(3086,2,'2016-06-24 13:30:38','2016-06-24 20:30:38','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector-300x274.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"300\" height=\"274\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3093 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"07 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3094\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"08 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil. Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3095\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"09 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3096\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"10 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"637\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3097\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"11 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"548\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3098\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"12 techniques gridlines\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou can also use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/grid-drawing-for-perfect-faces-and-forms/\">see-through grid</a> that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time.\r\n\r\nThe same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3099\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"13 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"746\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3100\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"14 techniques gridlines\" width=\"483\" height=\"169\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3101\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"15 techniques gridlines\" width=\"303\" height=\"122\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3102\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"16 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"783\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3103\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"17 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3104\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"18 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-autosave-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:30:38','2016-06-24 20:30:38','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3084,2,'2016-06-24 10:28:54','2016-06-24 17:28:54','Ok kiddos I’m back – it’s the artist you love to hate! First off I need to apologize because my scanner was in that mood where it wanted to do want it wants, so some scans will have black smudges on them...bummer. The other thing is I was not feeling this drawing, sort of. As the title stated, this is a tutorial for how to draw Tom Brady...a man!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2998\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"480\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/how-to-draw-tom-brady-reference.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2998\"><img class=\"wp-image-2998 size-full\" title=\"© Jerry Coli | Dreamstime.com\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/how-to-draw-tom-brady-reference.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw tom brady reference\" width=\"480\" height=\"600\" /></a> <center>© <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/wickedgood_info\">Jerry Coli</a> | <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\nAs I have stated in previous articles, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-shade-a-drawing-of-a-man/\">I’m not into drawing men</a>. I lean a lot toward women because well, I’m a guy! There’s no stimulation for me in drawing men, but as an artist one needs to diversify. I cannot limit myself to just women only.\r\n\r\nEven though I’ll grumble under my breath about having a man as an art subject, I know it’s necessary to draw them if I want to flourish and grow into a better and more diversified artist. With that being said, let’s bite down and get through this one.\r\n<h2>Use a Light Box for the Basics</h2>\r\nAs I stated earlier, this is a guy so I wanted to finish this drawing as quickly as possible. With that being said, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">I used a light box</a>. I used it not only for the subject in general but I wanted to capture his frizzled hair as closely as I could; not to mention, I wanted to capture the majority of his jersey wrinkles.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001-3-1.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-3001\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3001\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001-3-1.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001-3\" width=\"418\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Eyes</h2>\r\nBelieve it or not, his eyes were a challenge for the simple fact that they didn’t show up well on the light box. I had to take a hypothetical guess as well as look at the original picture to get his eyes close to how they were in the original picture. I added some shading with a tortillion around the eye area and used a Blu Tack erasure to lift some of the markings in the lower, left corners of the eyes to illustrate some highlight.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0002-3.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2839\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-2839\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0002-3.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"394\" height=\"155\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Mouth</h2>\r\nI then started on the mouth. It needs to be said that drawing the lips of men and women are different. With women, you want to add pencil or color to both the upper and lower lip section. With men, color in the upper lip but DO NOT ADD COLOR TO THE LOWER LIP - PERIOD.\r\n\r\nWhat you want to do is add shading under the lower lip to show some form of the lower lip. Men’s lower lips are usually illustrated with the same skin tone that is in the surrounding mouth area. Usually there is a line to separate where the lip is and where the chin area is.\r\n\r\nDon’t believe me? Look at a cartoon with male characters in them and tell me what you see. The females have full lips that are red and the males always have a line to separate what is their lower lip and the chin area.\r\n\r\nIn the case of the lip here, I just used a tortillion. If I got enough graphite on my tortillion from a previous job, I’ll just smudge what’s on there to give it a faint or smudged look.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0003-3.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2840\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-2840\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0003-3.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"253\" height=\"116\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Hair</h2>\r\nTime to do some hair! In this case, I added more dark tone to the hair onto the previous dark markings from the light box sketch. I usually use a 2H pencil first, coloring in the graphite followed by tissue blending and then adding dark tone.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0004-3.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2841\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-2841\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0004-3.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"515\" height=\"501\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn this case, I added the dark tone followed by some smudging with the tortillion. I then colored the hair with a 2H pencil and then added hair streaks and strands by using a pencil erasure.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0005-3.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2842\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-2842\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0005-3.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"515\" height=\"501\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Face and Final Details</h2>\r\nTo finish up the face, I just use a tortillion to smudge in some shade in the necessary areas. I had enough graphite on the tortillion.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0006-3.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2843\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-2843\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0006-3.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"515\" height=\"667\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then added some shading to the uniform with an HB pencil in some areas, followed by shading and smudging with a tortillion.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007-2-1.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-3000\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3000\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007-2-1.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007-2\" width=\"501\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI finish up the drawing with darkening of the pants and some shading of the arms (yes, I pulled out the tortillion again). I didn’t work on the hands. I provide <span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\">a separate tutorial about that</span> and I’ll probably do more on that subject in the future.\r\n\r\nAnywho, there you go ladies and gentlemen, the drawing of Tom Brady at his finest……well maybe not at his finest, but you get the drift.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/how-to-draw-tom-brady.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2999\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-2999\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/how-to-draw-tom-brady.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw tom brady\" width=\"461\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\nLove him or hate him, he’s in a better position than us, but it’s cool...we’re artists! Even when we’re 80 years old, we’ll still be drawing and painting. Can he still say the same about himself when he reaches that age?','How to Draw Tom Brady','','inherit','closed','closed','','2836-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 10:28:54','2016-06-24 17:28:54','',2836,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2836-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3090,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:30','2016-06-24 18:45:30','','04 techniques light box','','inherit','open','closed','','04-techniques-light-box','','','2016-06-24 11:45:30','2016-06-24 18:45:30','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3091,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:32','2016-06-24 18:45:32','','05 techniques light box','','inherit','open','closed','','05-techniques-light-box','','','2016-06-24 11:45:32','2016-06-24 18:45:32','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3092,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:34','2016-06-24 18:45:34','','06 techniques projector','','inherit','open','closed','','06-techniques-projector','','','2016-06-24 11:45:34','2016-06-24 18:45:34','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3093,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:36','2016-06-24 18:45:36','','07 techniques graphite paper','','inherit','open','closed','','07-techniques-graphite-paper','','','2016-06-24 11:45:36','2016-06-24 18:45:36','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3094,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:38','2016-06-24 18:45:38','','08 techniques graphite paper','','inherit','open','closed','','08-techniques-graphite-paper','','','2016-06-24 11:45:38','2016-06-24 18:45:38','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3095,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:40','2016-06-24 18:45:40','','09 techniques graphite paper','','inherit','open','closed','','09-techniques-graphite-paper','','','2016-06-24 11:45:40','2016-06-24 18:45:40','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3096,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:42','2016-06-24 18:45:42','','10 techniques graphite paper','','inherit','open','closed','','10-techniques-graphite-paper','','','2016-06-24 11:45:42','2016-06-24 18:45:42','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3097,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:45','2016-06-24 18:45:45','','11 techniques graphite paper','','inherit','open','closed','','11-techniques-graphite-paper','','','2016-06-24 11:45:45','2016-06-24 18:45:45','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3098,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:47','2016-06-24 18:45:47','','12 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','12-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:47','2016-06-24 18:45:47','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3099,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:49','2016-06-24 18:45:49','','13 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','13-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:49','2016-06-24 18:45:49','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3100,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:52','2016-06-24 18:45:52','','14 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','14-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:52','2016-06-24 18:45:52','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3101,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:53','2016-06-24 18:45:53','','15 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','15-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:53','2016-06-24 18:45:53','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0);
INSERT INTO `wp_posts` VALUES (3102,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:55','2016-06-24 18:45:55','','16 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','16-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:55','2016-06-24 18:45:55','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3103,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:57','2016-06-24 18:45:57','','17 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','17-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:57','2016-06-24 18:45:57','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3104,2,'2016-06-24 11:45:59','2016-06-24 18:45:59','','18 techniques gridlines','','inherit','open','closed','','18-techniques-gridlines','','','2016-06-24 11:45:59','2016-06-24 18:45:59','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3105,2,'2016-06-24 12:00:10','2016-06-24 19:00:10','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"800\" height=\"731\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2739 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0007-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2740 alignleft\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0008-1-229x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0008\" width=\"229\" height=\"300\" /><img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2741 alignright\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0009-1-229x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0009\" width=\"229\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail. Hair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil.Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking. Once you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2742\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0010-1-239x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0010\" width=\"239\" height=\"300\" /><a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0011-1.jpg\"><img class=\"alignright wp-image-2743 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0011-1-206x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0011\" width=\"206\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\n<img class=\"alignleft wp-image-2744 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0012-1-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0012\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /><img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2745 alignright\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0013-1-300x280.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0013\" width=\"300\" height=\"280\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.You can also use a see-through grid that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time. The same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2746 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0014-300x105.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0014\" width=\"300\" height=\"105\" />\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2747 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0015-300x121.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0015\" width=\"300\" height=\"121\" />\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2748 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0016-300x294.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0016\" width=\"300\" height=\"294\" />\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2749 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0017-215x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0017\" width=\"215\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2750 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0018-215x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0018\" width=\"215\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 12:00:10','2016-06-24 19:00:10','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3109,2,'2016-06-24 13:30:25','2016-06-24 20:30:25','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector-300x274.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"300\" height=\"274\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3093 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"07 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3094\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"08 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil. Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3095\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"09 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3096\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"10 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"637\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3097\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"11 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"548\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3098\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"12 techniques gridlines\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou can also use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/grid-drawing-for-perfect-faces-and-forms/\">see-through grid</a> that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time.\r\n\r\nThe same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3099\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"13 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"746\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3100\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"14 techniques gridlines\" width=\"483\" height=\"169\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3101\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"15 techniques gridlines\" width=\"303\" height=\"122\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3102\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"16 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"783\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3103\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"17 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3104\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"18 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:30:25','2016-06-24 20:30:25','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3106,2,'2016-06-24 13:21:07','2016-06-24 20:21:07','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector-300x274.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"300\" height=\"274\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3093 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"07 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3094\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"08 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil. Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3095\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"09 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3096\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"10 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"637\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3097\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"11 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"548\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3098\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"12 techniques gridlines\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou can also use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/grid-drawing-for-perfect-faces-and-forms/\">see-through grid</a> that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time.\r\n\r\nThe same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3099\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"13 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"746\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3100\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"14 techniques gridlines\" width=\"483\" height=\"169\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3101\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"15 techniques gridlines\" width=\"303\" height=\"122\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3102\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"16 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"783\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3103\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"17 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3104\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"18 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:21:07','2016-06-24 20:21:07','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3108,2,'2016-06-24 13:27:55','2016-06-24 20:27:55','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector-300x274.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"300\" height=\"274\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3093 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"07 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3094\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"08 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil. Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3095\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"09 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3096\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"10 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"637\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3097\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"11 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"548\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3098\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"12 techniques gridlines\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou can also use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/grid-drawing-for-perfect-faces-and-forms/\">see-through grid</a> that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time.\r\n\r\nThe same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3099\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"13 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"746\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3100\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"14 techniques gridlines\" width=\"483\" height=\"169\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3101\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"15 techniques gridlines\" width=\"303\" height=\"122\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3102\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"16 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"783\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3103\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"17 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3104\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"18 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:27:55','2016-06-24 20:27:55','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3107,2,'2016-06-24 13:24:53','2016-06-24 20:24:53','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector-300x274.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"300\" height=\"274\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3093 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"07 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3094\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"08 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil. Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3095\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"09 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3096\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"10 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"637\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3097\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"11 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"548\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3098\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"12 techniques gridlines\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou can also use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/grid-drawing-for-perfect-faces-and-forms/\">see-through grid</a> that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time.\r\n\r\nThe same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3099\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"13 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"746\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3100\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"14 techniques gridlines\" width=\"483\" height=\"169\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3101\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"15 techniques gridlines\" width=\"303\" height=\"122\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3102\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"16 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"783\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3103\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"17 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3104\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"18 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:24:53','2016-06-24 20:24:53','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3110,2,'2016-06-24 13:32:54','2016-06-24 20:32:54','What I’m about to share with you is a risk for me. I’m risking mobs of angry artists coming and burning down my house and crucifying me upside down. I will be sharing a secret that many artists use that make us look like we can do the outline of a drawing without any type of help. It can be said that most of us don’t need help drawing, but if you constantly do figures like I do, you want to be anatomically correct. The secret I’m talking about is using a shortcut, such as a light box or any of the other items that will be discussed in this article.\r\n\r\nThe first question that forms in your head is: “Doesn’t using a light box constitute a form of cheating? You’re not a real artist if you use one.” Let me answer that question with a question. Can a garbage man do his job without a truck? Can a doctor operate on you without medical tools? Can a dentist take care of your teeth without the proper tools? I think you know the answer to these questions. Anyone that says you’re not a real artist with a light box is sadly misinformed. A light box is a NECESSARY TOOL if you want to be a serious artist of realistic work.\r\n\r\nA great pro for the light box is that it saves you time. If you are like me, you need a light box to help cut down your outline drawing time, and in essence, get more art pieces cranked out than you can accomplish by just drawing freehand. It also helps with accuracy with the figures and items that will be in your picture. The light box isn’t just the only item you can use. Rather than drawing by traditional freehand, you can also use a projector, graphite paper, or guidelines. Let’s look at some examples of drawing subjects using each of these techniques.\r\n<h2>1. Light Box</h2>\r\nOK so the first example here was done using a light box. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/light-box/\">light box</a> is used to trace the outside edges of the subject and other items that will be in the picture. Again, this technique is to help shave down time in drawing the contour outline.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3087\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"01 techniques light box\" width=\"720\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I quickly did the eyes by smudging them with a tortillion and lips by darkening them a little with a 3B pencil and then smudging it with the tortillion as well. I then started working on the hair by using an HB pencil and leaving some spots untouched to later illustrate light reflecting off the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3088\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"02 techniques light box\" width=\"578\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then smudge the pencil mark that’s in the hair followed by dark pencil marks that will portray hair strands. As always, do not smudge these marks. You want to show some hair detail and you cannot if these are smudged. I have also started adding some tortillion smudge to the face. It’s not much but I’m not worried about it for the time being. I have time to go back and add more later.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3089\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"03 techniques light box\" width=\"712\" height=\"559\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, I’ve started on her outfit. Nothing special here; I used a 3B pencil and shaded/smudged the black with a tortillion. I then used the same tortillion to add some shade and coloring to her sports bra.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3090\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"04 techniques light box\" width=\"450\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing I needed to do was add some detail to the skin and arms by using a tortillion again. I went back to the head again and just added some shading to the forehead to illustrate some realism.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3091\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-techniques-light-box.jpg\" alt=\"05 techniques light box\" width=\"405\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>2. Projector</h2>\r\nOK, unfortunately this drawing was a fail project.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3092 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-techniques-projector-300x274.jpg\" alt=\"06 techniques projector\" width=\"300\" height=\"274\" /></a>\r\n\r\nI was supposed to illustrate the second item you can use to draw the outline of a figure but I ended up using a light box to quickly get it done. With this picture, the projector was supposed to be used.\r\n\r\nI learned a valuable lesson that I will pass on to you guys. When using the projector, you need to make sure that the paper you are drawing on is a BIG piece of paper – 18x24 preferable. If you do it on something small, you will have to bring the projector closer to the paper and that’s bad business. You will not have any room to move around, plus you run the risk of bumping into the projector and knocking the tracing off point.\r\n\r\nIt would be best that you use a bigger piece of paper and not like what I did when getting ready for this article. Glad though I found out so I could give you guys a no-no pointer.\r\n<h2>3. Graphite Paper</h2>\r\nNow this next technique is what I used when I first started drawing. I kept my method a secret from everyone in fear of being exposed but now, who cares right? I’ve learned that many people don’t care what technique you use, in contrast to the actual concept of the art piece and the medium used. I don’t think I remember how this technique was presented to me except that I was in Michael’s and I saw graphite tracing paper and I put two and two together. To me that was heaven sent; I needed something that would cut my outline, drawing time down and here it was! The only bad thing about using graphite tracing paper is that it’s messy. You’ll get some of the graphite onto your fingers and on the paper that you’re tracing on, causing unnecessary erasing.\r\n\r\nYou start by first having the sheet of paper that you will be drawing on, followed by the graphite paper, then the picture on top that you’ll be copying. Another thing you might want to do is tape the original picture to the paper that will be the copy and casually slip the graphite paper in between the sheets of paper and trace.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3093 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-techniques-graphite-paper-221x300.jpg\" alt=\"07 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"221\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou guys know my routine by now: eyes, lips, and eyebrows. With the eyes, don’t forget to add some highlight for the pupil and iris and add some shading to the upper part of the eye to show a little bit of shadow. Smudge the eye lid crease and the eyebrow, adding some hair to illustrate random detail.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3094\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/08-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"08 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHair is pretty simple here. Color it fully using a 3H or 2H pencil. Take some tissue and blend/smudge over the whole pencil marking.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3095\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"09 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"610\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you’ve done that, go back with a darker pencil and add strands to the head to portray different tones. The pencil strokes will be the darker part of her hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3096\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"10 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"637\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last things we will do is first add tone to her shirt with some blending. After that, we will take a tortillion and add shading on the face and neck where necessary.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3097\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-techniques-graphite-paper.jpg\" alt=\"11 techniques graphite paper\" width=\"548\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>4. Guidelines</h2>\r\nThe last technique we will look at is one that I don’t care for – guidelines. In some cases, <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">measuring is involved</a>. You need the right distances between the eyes, noses, mouth, and hairline. You may need to get the proper measurements off the original picture and then add or take away inches and centimeters depending on the size of paper that you will be working on.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-medium wp-image-3098\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/12-techniques-gridlines-300x246.jpg\" alt=\"12 techniques gridlines\" width=\"300\" height=\"246\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou can also use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/grid-drawing-for-perfect-faces-and-forms/\">see-through grid</a> that already has grids and lines placed on the plate. You then just put it on top of the picture and then mimic what you see onto your sheet of paper. You want to break up the grids into individual sections and focus only on what is in one grid at a time.\r\n\r\nThe same goes with the regular lines. They will be a bit more of a challenge because you won’t have a small section to draw in. The lines in this case serve as guidelines in drawing down the basics.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3099\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/13-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"13 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"746\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nOnce you have the basics down, attack the eyes first. As always, don’t forget the highlight in the eye and the upper shading in the eye. If you have a second, go ahead and smudge the eyelid crease and the eyebrow some so as not to forget like I have in the past.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3100\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/14-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"14 techniques gridlines\" width=\"483\" height=\"169\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou got my pattern down yet? Eyes, mouth, and hair. In this state, you knew the mouth and lips were coming. You have a choice here. You can draw some lines on the lower lips to implement shading or you can just begin smudging with a tortillion. In this case, I smudged it with a tortillion, both top and bottom. I also used a little bit of a dark pencil (7B) and tortillion to shade and smudge the inside of the mouth and the small space between the teeth and gums.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3101\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/15-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"15 techniques gridlines\" width=\"303\" height=\"122\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe hair is easy in this situation. She’s a blonde so I will use a 5H pencil to color the hair and fill in certain areas where it’s darker. I will then smudge the entire area will tissue – it serves the same purpose as a tortillion would but it spreads the graphite wider. The last thing I will do is use a pencil eraser to add in highlights. I find this easier to use than a kneaded eraser – I don’t have to worry about re-shaping the eraser or it giving way to the pressure of erasing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3102\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/16-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"16 techniques gridlines\" width=\"800\" height=\"783\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI start now on adding some shading to the face (using tortillion after the aftermath), some shading scribble to her shirt, and adding dark tone to her secondary tank top underneath.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3103\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/17-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"17 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing to work on is to smudge and blend areas in her face and arm, and in her shirt.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3104\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/18-techniques-gridlines.jpg\" alt=\"18 techniques gridlines\" width=\"572\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Now that the secret is out...</h2>\r\nAgain, we used these drawings of different faces as a quick study on how to use shortcut techniques to sketch an image onto a sheet of paper from its original picture. I’m pretty sure a mob of angry artists is not going to be too happy thinking I’ve given their secret away; but hey, it’s not a secret. These are necessary tools and tricks that don\'t get time in the spotlight. Hopefully this article will help shed light on some of the methods that we use, and hopefully those methods are not interpreted as “cheating.”','Four Drawing Shortcut Techniques You Will Not Regret Using','','inherit','closed','closed','','2732-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:32:54','2016-06-24 20:32:54','',2732,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2732-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3114,2,'2016-06-24 22:43:42','2016-06-25 05:43:42','You know those furry things that live just above your eyelids? Yes, the eyebrows! Each eyebrow is as unique as a fingerprint--- no two are exactly alike. This helps make us all unique and fantastic creatures of nature, but it can cause a real headache if you are just learning to draw faces. There are \"tricks\" that I like to use when drawing eyebrows and that is what I am going to share with you in this tutorial.\r\n\r\nThe eyebrows are really fascinating if you think about them. They are made of hair, but don\'t grow like the hair on our heads. They sit in an odd place, on our brow bone, which is not on our eyes, nor on our forehead. They just sit there, protecting our eyes from falling debris, right? Not exactly. Have you ever been talking to someone and known exactly what they were thinking or how they felt about what you just said? It\'s the eyebrows!\r\n\r\nIn order to show expression with eyebrows, you first need to know how to draw eyebrows realistically.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nTo place your eyebrow correctly, use the top of the nostril crease for a guide. The innermost edge of the eyebrow should generally line up vertically (line A). The arch of the brow will peak at approximately a 45 degree angle (line B). The outer edge of the brow creates a line from the nostril crease through the outer crease of the eyelid and water line (Line C).\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2909\" align=\"alignnone\" width=\"225\"]<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2909\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"Use the nostril crease as a guide\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /> Use the nostril crease as a guide.[/caption]\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2911\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow2\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nNext, you want to <em>very lightly</em> sketch out a basic shape for the eyebrow. If you tend to be heavy-handed, I suggest using a pencil graded 2H-HB.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2912\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nStart adding in individual hairs, again I suggest using a lighter grade pencil. Draw the hairs in the direction that they grow, easing up on the pressure as you lift the pencil off of the page. Think \"press and lift\". Never \"color\" in a solid value. This will make the eyebrows look cartoonish. Remember, the goal is to make the drawing as realistic as possible. You may occasionally stray outside of the outlined shape. That is okay. The outlined shape is just a guide. That is why you drew it lightly. You can easily erase or draw over the guide as needed. Also, if the areas where your eyebrow hairs strayed from the guide bother you, you can always erase them as well. (Drawing lightly when beginning any drawing is always a good idea.) The eraser is just as valuable a drawing tool as the pencil! I prefer white acrylic erasers. Some artists prefer gum erasers, some prefer kneaded erasers and some artists grab whatever is handy! I also use an electric eraser-- they are great for highlights, especially when drawing any type of hair, like drawing the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2913\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3a\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nThink about how the light is going to hit the eyebrows and add some lowlights with a softer (darker value) pencil, or more pressure. This is another place you can use your eraser for drawing, whether you have gotten too dark or just think you need to add dimension. Shading in the eyebrow hairs and then using the eraser for highlights creates a realistic thickness to the hair.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2914\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow4\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nUse the same process for the other eyebrow in the opposite direction. Don\'t stress too much about making the eyebrows perfectly symmetrical. It seems counter-intuitive, but nothing on the human face is perfectly symmetrical. If you do draw the eyebrows in perfect symmetry, something will appear \"off\" to anyone who views the drawing. It may be subconsciously, but the viewer will know something is not right. Near symmetry is a good idea, however. There are set standards of beauty in Western culture where certain women have been considered to be an example due to their nearly symmetrical features. If you wish to see an example, consider Marilyn Monroe or Halle Berry. When using a real person for a reference for your drawing, you will have an easier time illustrating a more realistic symmetry. When creating a drawing of a fictional person, beware of making them too perfectly symmetrical if realism is your goal.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2915\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5-300x225.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow5\" width=\"300\" height=\"225\" />\r\n\r\nAll of the previous \"tricks\" can be used when drawing eyebrows with expression. The main difference will be how much distance you put between the eyebrow and the upper eyelid. A surprised or startled eye may have a lot of space between the upper eyelid and the brow, but of course never more than the skin can possibly be stretched. You would not draw the eyebrow next to the hairline, for example. Conversely, when the person is angry or concentrating very hard on something, their eyebrows will push closer (lower) to the eyelid and slightly angle inwardly toward the inner corner of the eye.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2916\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow6\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned before, every eyebrow is unique! The eyebrows in this article are pretty basic. The most important part of drawing any facial feature is to use a reference. Some people have very thin, light eyebrows. Some people have bushy, unruly, dark eyebrows. Some people (such as the amazing artist Frida Kahlo) have the infamous \"uni-brow\". Every type of eyebrow will use the rule of drawing the hairs in the direction the are growing (or groomed). All hairs will use the pressure rule and will have a light source that creates darker shaded areas.\r\n\r\nAlso notice that the skin has a smoother texture than the eyebrow. I used a blending stump to make a smoother skin texture, and cast shadow to make the eyebrows look more three-dimensional. I laid down a small bit of graphite just below the eyebrow drawing and smoothed it out with the blending stump, or tortillon. I continued this shading technique around the rest of the eye for a consistent texture. Remember, when drawing the eyebrow, it is not smooth. The hair-like texture is very important and easily created by varying the pencil and eraser marks within the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2917\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2129-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2129\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /><img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2918\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2126-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2126\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nI hope you found this tutorial useful! Attaining mastery with anything takes a lot of practice. Practice using the techniques I have outlined here and your eyebrow drawing is sure to improve. Happy drawing!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2919\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina-300x300.jpg\" alt=\"christina\" width=\"300\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','Drawing Eyebrows like a Boss!','','inherit','closed','closed','','2882-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 22:43:42','2016-06-25 05:43:42','',2882,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2882-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3112,2,'2016-06-24 13:51:50','2016-06-24 20:51:50','You know those furry things that live just above your eyelids? Yes, the eyebrows! Each eyebrow is as unique as a fingerprint--- no two are exactly alike. This helps make us all unique and fantastic creatures of nature, but it can cause a real headache if you are just learning to draw faces. There are \"tricks\" that I like to use when drawing eyebrows and that is what I am going to share with you in this tutorial.\r\n\r\nThe eyebrows are really fascinating if you think about them. They are made of hair, but don\'t grow like the hair on our heads. They sit in an odd place, on our brow bone, which is not on our eyes, nor on our forehead. They just sit there, protecting our eyes from falling debris, right? Not exactly. Have you ever been talking to someone and known exactly what they were thinking or how they felt about what you just said? It\'s the eyebrows!\r\n\r\nIn order to show expression with eyebrows, you first need to know how to draw eyebrows realistically.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nTo place your eyebrow correctly, use the top of the nostril crease for a guide. The innermost edge of the eyebrow should generally line up vertically (line A). The arch of the brow will peak at approximately a 45 degree angle (line B). The outer edge of the brow creates a line from the nostril crease through the outer crease of the eyelid and water line (Line C).\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2909\" align=\"alignnone\" width=\"225\"]<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2909\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"Use the nostril crease as a guide\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /> Use the nostril crease as a guide.[/caption]\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2911\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow2\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nNext, you want to <em>very lightly</em> sketch out a basic shape for the eyebrow. If you tend to be heavy-handed, I suggest using a pencil graded 2H-HB.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2912\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nStart adding in individual hairs, again I suggest using a lighter grade pencil. Draw the hairs in the direction that they grow, easing up on the pressure as you lift the pencil off of the page. Think \"press and lift\".  Never \"color\" in a solid value. This will make the eyebrows look cartoonish. Remember, the goal is to make the drawing as realistic as possible. You may occasionally stray outside of the outlined shape. That is okay. The outlined shape is just a guide. That is why you drew it lightly. You can easily erase or draw over the guide as needed. Also, if the areas where your eyebrow hairs strayed from the guide bother you, you can always erase them as well. (Drawing lightly when beginning any drawing is always a good idea.) The eraser is just as valuable a drawing tool as the pencil! I prefer white acrylic erasers. Some artists prefer gum erasers, some prefer kneaded erasers and some artists grab whatever is handy! I also use an electric eraser-- they are great for highlights, especially when drawing any type of hair, like drawing the eyebrow.*****\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2913\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3a\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nThink about how the light is going to hit the eyebrows and add some lowlights with a softer (darker value) pencil, or more pressure. This is another place you can use your eraser for drawing, whether you have gotten too dark, or just think you need to add dimension. Shading in the eyebrow hairs and then using the eraser for highlights creates a realistic thickness to the hair.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2914\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow4\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nUse the same process for the other eyebrow in the opposite direction. Don\'t stress too much about making the eyebrows perfectly symmetrical. It seems counter-intuitive, but nothing on the human face is perfectly symmetrical. If you do draw the eyebrows in perfect symmetry, something will appear \"off\" to anyone who views the drawing. It may be subconsciously, but the viewer will know something is not right. Near symmetry is a good idea, however. There are set standards of beauty in Western culture where certain women have been considered to be an example due to their measurable near symmetry. If you wish to see an example, consider Marilyn Monroe or Halle Berry. When using a real person for a reference for your drawing, you will have an easier time illustrating a more realistic symmetry. When creating a drawing of a fictional person, beware of making them too perfectly symmetrical, if realism is your goal.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2915\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5-300x225.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow5\" width=\"300\" height=\"225\" />\r\n\r\nAll of the previous \"tricks\" can be used when drawing eyebrows with expression. The main difference will be how much distance you put between the eyebrow and the upper eyelid. A surprised or startled eye may have a lot of space between the upper eye lid and the brow, but of course, never more than the skin can be possibly stretched. You would not draw the eyebrow next to the hairline, for example. Conversely, when the person is angry or concentrating very hard on something, their eyebrows will push closer (lower) to the eyelid and slightly angle inwardly toward the inner corner of the eye.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2916\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow6\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned before, every eyebrow is unique! The eyebrows in this article are pretty basic. The most important part of drawing any facial feature is to use a reference. Some people have very thin, light eyebrows. Some people have bushy, unruly, dark eyebrows. Some people (such as the amazing artist Frida Kahlo) have the infamous \"uni-brow\". Every type of eyebrow will use the rule of drawing the hairs in the direction the are growing (or groomed). All hairs will use the pressure rule and will have a light source that creates darker shaded areas.\r\n\r\nAlso notice that the skin has a smoother texture than the eyebrow. I used a blending stump to make a smoother skin texture, and cast shadow to make the eyebrows look more three-dimensional. I laid down a small bit of graphite just below the eyebrow drawing and smoothed it out with the blending stump, or tortillon. I continued this shading technique around the rest of the eye for a consistent texture. Remember, when drawing the eyebrow, it is not smooth. The hair-like texture is very important and easily created by varying the pencil and eraser marks within the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2917\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2129-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2129\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /><img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2918\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2126-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2126\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nI hope you found this tutorial useful! Attaining mastery with anything takes a lot of practice. Practice using the techniques I have outlined here and your eyebrow drawing is sure to improve. Happy drawing!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2919\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina-300x300.jpg\" alt=\"christina\" width=\"300\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','Drawing Eyebrows like a Boss!','','inherit','closed','closed','','2882-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 13:51:50','2016-06-24 20:51:50','',2882,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2882-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3113,2,'2016-06-24 16:44:09','2016-06-24 23:44:09','You know those furry things that live just above your eyelids? Yes, the eyebrows! Each eyebrow is as unique as a fingerprint--- no two are exactly alike. This helps make us all unique and fantastic creatures of nature, but it can cause a real headache if you are just learning to draw faces. There are \"tricks\" that I like to use when drawing eyebrows and that is what I am going to share with you in this tutorial.\r\n\r\nThe eyebrows are really fascinating if you think about them. They are made of hair, but don\'t grow like the hair on our heads. They sit in an odd place, on our brow bone, which is not on our eyes, nor on our forehead. They just sit there, protecting our eyes from falling debris, right? Not exactly. Have you ever been talking to someone and known exactly what they were thinking or how they felt about what you just said? It\'s the eyebrows!\r\n\r\nIn order to show expression with eyebrows, you first need to know how to draw eyebrows realistically.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nTo place your eyebrow correctly, use the top of the nostril crease for a guide. The innermost edge of the eyebrow should generally line up vertically (line A). The arch of the brow will peak at approximately a 45 degree angle (line B). The outer edge of the brow creates a line from the nostril crease through the outer crease of the eyelid and water line (Line C).\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2909\" align=\"alignnone\" width=\"225\"]<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2909\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"Use the nostril crease as a guide\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /> Use the nostril crease as a guide.[/caption]\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2911\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow2\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nNext, you want to <em>very lightly</em> sketch out a basic shape for the eyebrow. If you tend to be heavy-handed, I suggest using a pencil graded 2H-HB.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2912\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nStart adding in individual hairs, again I suggest using a lighter grade pencil. Draw the hairs in the direction that they grow, easing up on the pressure as you lift the pencil off of the page. Think \"press and lift\". Never \"color\" in a solid value. This will make the eyebrows look cartoonish. Remember, the goal is to make the drawing as realistic as possible. You may occasionally stray outside of the outlined shape. That is okay. The outlined shape is just a guide. That is why you drew it lightly. You can easily erase or draw over the guide as needed. Also, if the areas where your eyebrow hairs strayed from the guide bother you, you can always erase them as well. (Drawing lightly when beginning any drawing is always a good idea.) The eraser is just as valuable a drawing tool as the pencil! I prefer white acrylic erasers. Some artists prefer gum erasers, some prefer kneaded erasers and some artists grab whatever is handy! I also use an electric eraser-- they are great for highlights, especially when drawing any type of hair, like drawing the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2913\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3a\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nThink about how the light is going to hit the eyebrows and add some lowlights with a softer (darker value) pencil, or more pressure. This is another place you can use your eraser for drawing, whether you have gotten too dark or just think you need to add dimension. Shading in the eyebrow hairs and then using the eraser for highlights creates a realistic thickness to the hair.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2914\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow4\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nUse the same process for the other eyebrow in the opposite direction. Don\'t stress too much about making the eyebrows perfectly symmetrical. It seems counter-intuitive, but nothing on the human face is perfectly symmetrical. If you do draw the eyebrows in perfect symmetry, something will appear \"off\" to anyone who views the drawing. It may be subconsciously, but the viewer will know something is not right. Near symmetry is a good idea, however. There are set standards of beauty in Western culture where certain women have been considered to be an example due to their***** measurable near symmetry. If you wish to see an example, consider Marilyn Monroe or Halle Berry. When using a real person for a reference for your drawing, you will have an easier time illustrating a more realistic symmetry. When creating a drawing of a fictional person, beware of making them too perfectly symmetrical if realism is your goal.*****\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2915\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5-300x225.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow5\" width=\"300\" height=\"225\" />\r\n\r\nAll of the previous \"tricks\" can be used when drawing eyebrows with expression. The main difference will be how much distance you put between the eyebrow and the upper eyelid. A surprised or startled eye may have a lot of space between the upper eye lid and the brow, but of course, never more than the skin can be possibly stretched. You would not draw the eyebrow next to the hairline, for example. Conversely, when the person is angry or concentrating very hard on something, their eyebrows will push closer (lower) to the eyelid and slightly angle inwardly toward the inner corner of the eye.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2916\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow6\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nAs I mentioned before, every eyebrow is unique! The eyebrows in this article are pretty basic. The most important part of drawing any facial feature is to use a reference. Some people have very thin, light eyebrows. Some people have bushy, unruly, dark eyebrows. Some people (such as the amazing artist Frida Kahlo) have the infamous \"uni-brow\". Every type of eyebrow will use the rule of drawing the hairs in the direction the are growing (or groomed). All hairs will use the pressure rule and will have a light source that creates darker shaded areas.\r\n\r\nAlso notice that the skin has a smoother texture than the eyebrow. I used a blending stump to make a smoother skin texture, and cast shadow to make the eyebrows look more three-dimensional. I laid down a small bit of graphite just below the eyebrow drawing and smoothed it out with the blending stump, or tortillon. I continued this shading technique around the rest of the eye for a consistent texture. Remember, when drawing the eyebrow, it is not smooth. The hair-like texture is very important and easily created by varying the pencil and eraser marks within the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2917\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2129-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2129\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /><img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2918\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2126-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2126\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nI hope you found this tutorial useful! Attaining mastery with anything takes a lot of practice. Practice using the techniques I have outlined here and your eyebrow drawing is sure to improve. Happy drawing!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2919\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina-300x300.jpg\" alt=\"christina\" width=\"300\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','Drawing Eyebrows like a Boss!','','inherit','closed','closed','','2882-revision-v1','','','2016-06-24 16:44:09','2016-06-24 23:44:09','',2882,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2882-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3115,2,'2016-06-25 10:05:33','2016-06-25 17:05:33','You know those furry things that live just above your eyelids? Yes, the eyebrows! Each eyebrow is as unique as a fingerprint--- no two are exactly alike. This helps make us all unique and fantastic creatures of nature, but it can cause a real headache if you are just learning to draw faces. There are \"tricks\" that I like to use when drawing eyebrows, and that is what I am going to share with you in this tutorial.\r\n\r\nThe eyebrows are really fascinating if you think about them. They are made of hair, but don\'t grow like the hair on our heads. They sit in an odd place, on our brow bone, which is not on our eyes, nor on our forehead. They just sit there, protecting our eyes from falling debris, right? Not exactly. Have you ever been talking to someone and known exactly what they were thinking or how they felt about what you just said? It\'s the eyebrows!\r\n\r\nIn order to show expression with eyebrows, you first need to know how to draw eyebrows realistically.\r\n<h2>Placement of the Eyebrow</h2>\r\nTo place your eyebrow correctly, use the top of the nostril crease for a guide. The innermost edge of the eyebrow should generally line up vertically (line A). The arch of the brow will peak at approximately a 45 degree angle (line B). The outer edge of the brow creates a line from the nostril crease through the outer crease of the eyelid and water line (Line C).\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2909\" align=\"alignnone\" width=\"225\"]<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2909\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"Use the nostril crease as a guide\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /> Use the nostril crease as a guide.[/caption]\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2911\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow2\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext, you want to <em>very lightly</em> sketch out a basic shape for the eyebrow. If you tend to be heavy-handed, I suggest using a pencil graded 2H-HB.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2912\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Drawing Realistic Eyebrows</h2>\r\nStart adding in individual hairs. Again I suggest using a lighter grade pencil. Draw the hairs in the direction that they grow, easing up on the pressure as you lift the pencil off of the page. Think \"press and lift\". Never \"color\" in a solid value. This will make the eyebrows look cartoonish. Remember, the goal is to make the drawing as realistic as possible. You may occasionally stray outside of the outlined shape. That is okay. The outlined shape is just a guide. That is why you drew it lightly.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2913\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3a\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nYou can easily erase or draw over the guide as needed. Also, if the areas where your eyebrow hairs strayed from the guide bother you, you can always erase them as well. (Drawing lightly when beginning any drawing is always a good idea.) The eraser is just as valuable a drawing tool as the pencil! I prefer white acrylic erasers. Some artists prefer gum erasers, some prefer kneaded erasers and some artists grab whatever is handy! I also use an <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/electric-eraser/\">electric eraser</a>-- they are great for highlights, especially when drawing any type of hair, like drawing the eyebrow.\r\n\r\nThink about how the light is going to hit the eyebrows and add some lowlights with a softer (darker value) pencil, or more pressure. This is another place you can use your eraser for drawing, whether you have gotten too dark or just think you need to add dimension. Shading in the eyebrow hairs and then using the eraser for highlights creates a realistic thickness to the hair.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2914\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow4\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the same process for the other eyebrow in the opposite direction. Don\'t stress too much about making the eyebrows perfectly symmetrical. It seems counter-intuitive, but nothing on the human face is perfectly symmetrical.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2915\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5-300x225.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow5\" width=\"300\" height=\"225\" />\r\n\r\nIf you do draw the eyebrows in perfect symmetry, something will appear \"off\" to anyone who views the drawing. It may be subconsciously, but the viewer will know something is not right. Near symmetry is a good idea, however. There are set standards of beauty in Western culture where certain women have been considered to be an example due to their nearly symmetrical features. If you wish to see an example, consider Marilyn Monroe or Halle Berry.\r\n\r\nWhen using a real person for a reference for your drawing, you will have an easier time illustrating a more realistic symmetry. When creating a drawing of a fictional person, beware of making them too perfectly symmetrical if realism is your goal.\r\n<h2>Expressive Eyebrows</h2>\r\nAll of the previous \"tricks\" can be used when drawing eyebrows with expression. The main difference will be how much distance you put between the eyebrow and the upper eyelid. A surprised or startled eye may have a lot of space between the upper eyelid and the brow, but of course never more than the skin can possibly be stretched. You would not draw the eyebrow next to the hairline, for example. Conversely, when the person is angry or concentrating very hard on something, their eyebrows will push closer (lower) to the eyelid and slightly angle inwardly toward the inner corner of the eye.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2916\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow6\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>No Two Eyebrows Are the Same</h2>\r\nAs I mentioned before, every eyebrow is unique! The eyebrows in this article are pretty basic. The most important part of drawing any facial feature is to use a reference. Some people have very thin, light eyebrows. Some people have bushy, unruly, dark eyebrows. Some people (such as the amazing artist <a href=\"http://www.biography.com/people/frida-kahlo-9359496\">Frida Kahlo</a>) have the infamous \"uni-brow\". Every type of eyebrow will use the rule of drawing the hairs in the direction the are growing (or groomed). All hairs will use the pressure rule and will have a light source that creates darker shaded areas.\r\n\r\nAlso notice that the skin has a smoother texture than the eyebrow. I used a blending stump to make a smoother skin texture, and cast shadow to make the eyebrows look more three-dimensional. I laid down a small bit of graphite just below the eyebrow drawing and smoothed it out with the blending stump, or tortillon. I continued this shading technique around the rest of the eye for a consistent texture. Remember, when drawing the eyebrow, it is not smooth. The hair-like texture is very important and easily created by varying the pencil and eraser marks within the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2917\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2129-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2129\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /><img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2918\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/IMG_2126-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_2126\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI hope you found this tutorial on drawing eyebrows useful! Attaining mastery with anything takes a lot of practice. Practice using the techniques I have outlined here and your eyebrow drawing is sure to improve. Happy drawing!\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2919\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina-300x300.jpg\" alt=\"christina\" width=\"300\" height=\"300\" />','Drawing Eyebrows like a Boss!','','inherit','closed','closed','','2882-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 10:05:33','2016-06-25 17:05:33','',2882,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2882-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3117,2,'2016-06-25 10:28:55','2016-06-25 17:28:55','You know those furry things that live just above your eyelids? Yes, the eyebrows! Each eyebrow is as unique as a fingerprint--- no two are exactly alike. This helps make us all unique and fantastic creatures of nature, but it can cause a real headache if you are just learning to draw faces. There are \"tricks\" that I like to use when drawing eyebrows, and that is what I am going to share with you in this tutorial.\r\n\r\nThe eyebrows are really fascinating if you think about them. They are made of hair, but don\'t grow like the hair on our heads. They sit in an odd place, on our brow bone, which is not on our eyes, nor on our forehead. They just sit there, protecting our eyes from falling debris, right? Not exactly. Have you ever been talking to someone and known exactly what they were thinking or how they felt about what you just said? It\'s the eyebrows!\r\n\r\nIn order to show expression with eyebrows, you first need to know how to draw eyebrows realistically.\r\n<h2>Placement of the Eyebrow</h2>\r\nTo place your eyebrow correctly, use the top of the nostril crease for a guide. The innermost edge of the eyebrow should generally line up vertically (line A). The arch of the brow will peak at approximately a 45 degree angle (line B). The outer edge of the brow creates a line from the nostril crease through the outer crease of the eyelid and water line (Line C).\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2909\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"480\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-2909 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1.jpg\" alt=\"Use the nostril crease as a guide\" width=\"480\" height=\"640\" /></a> Use the nostril crease as a guide.[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2911 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow2\" width=\"465\" height=\"621\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext, you want to <em>very lightly</em> sketch out a basic shape for the eyebrow. If you tend to be heavy-handed, I suggest using a pencil graded 2H-HB.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2912 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Drawing Realistic Eyebrows</h2>\r\nStart adding in individual hairs. Again I suggest using a lighter grade pencil. Draw the hairs in the direction that they grow, easing up on the pressure as you lift the pencil off of the page. Think \"press and lift\". Never \"color\" in a solid value. This will make the eyebrows look cartoonish. Remember, the goal is to make the drawing as realistic as possible. You may occasionally stray outside of the outlined shape. That is okay. The outlined shape is just a guide. That is why you drew it lightly.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2913 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3a\" width=\"471\" height=\"627\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou can easily erase or draw over the guide as needed. Also, if the areas where your eyebrow hairs strayed from the guide bother you, you can always erase them as well. (Drawing lightly when beginning any drawing is always a good idea.) The eraser is just as valuable a drawing tool as the pencil! I prefer white acrylic erasers. Some artists prefer gum erasers, some prefer kneaded erasers and some artists grab whatever is handy! I also use an <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/electric-eraser/\">electric eraser</a>-- they are great for highlights, especially when drawing any type of hair, like drawing the eyebrow.\r\n\r\nThink about how the light is going to hit the eyebrows and add some lowlights with a softer (darker value) pencil, or more pressure. This is another place you can use your eraser for drawing, whether you have gotten too dark or just think you need to add dimension. Shading in the eyebrow hairs and then using the eraser for highlights creates a realistic thickness to the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2914 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow4\" width=\"480\" height=\"640\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the same process for the other eyebrow in the opposite direction. Don\'t stress too much about making the eyebrows perfectly symmetrical. It seems counter-intuitive, but nothing on the human face is perfectly symmetrical.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2915 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow5\" width=\"640\" height=\"480\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you do draw the eyebrows in perfect symmetry, something will appear \"off\" to anyone who views the drawing. It may be subconsciously, but the viewer will know something is not right. Near symmetry is a good idea, however. There are set standards of beauty in Western culture where certain women have been considered to be an example due to their nearly symmetrical features. If you wish to see an example, consider Marilyn Monroe or Halle Berry.\r\n\r\nWhen using a real person for a reference for your drawing, you will have an easier time illustrating a more realistic symmetry. When creating a drawing of a fictional person, beware of making them too perfectly symmetrical if realism is your goal.\r\n<h2>Expressive Eyebrows</h2>\r\nAll of the previous \"tricks\" can be used when drawing eyebrows with expression. The main difference will be how much distance you put between the eyebrow and the upper eyelid. A surprised or startled eye may have a lot of space between the upper eyelid and the brow, but of course never more than the skin can possibly be stretched. You would not draw the eyebrow next to the hairline, for example. Conversely, when the person is angry or concentrating very hard on something, their eyebrows will push closer (lower) to the eyelid and slightly angle inwardly toward the inner corner of the eye.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2916 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow6\" width=\"473\" height=\"631\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>No Two Eyebrows Are the Same</h2>\r\nAs I mentioned before, every eyebrow is unique! The eyebrows in this article are pretty basic. The most important part of drawing any facial feature is to use a reference. Some people have very thin, light eyebrows. Some people have bushy, unruly, dark eyebrows. Some people (such as the amazing artist <a href=\"http://www.biography.com/people/frida-kahlo-9359496\">Frida Kahlo</a>) have the infamous \"uni-brow\". Every type of eyebrow will use the rule of drawing the hairs in the direction the are growing (or groomed). All hairs will use the pressure rule and will have a light source that creates darker shaded areas.\r\n\r\nAlso notice that the skin has a smoother texture than the eyebrow. I used a blending stump to make a smoother skin texture, and cast shadow to make the eyebrows look more three-dimensional. I laid down a small bit of graphite just below the eyebrow drawing and smoothed it out with the blending stump, or tortillon. I continued this shading technique around the rest of the eye for a consistent texture. Remember, when drawing the eyebrow, it is not smooth. The hair-like texture is very important and easily created by varying the pencil and eraser marks within the eyebrow.\r\n\r\nI hope you found this tutorial on drawing eyebrows useful! Attaining mastery with anything takes a lot of practice. Practice using the techniques I have outlined here and your eyebrow drawing is sure to improve. Happy drawing!\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2919 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina.jpg\" alt=\"christina\" width=\"720\" height=\"720\" /></a>','Drawing Eyebrows like a Boss!','','inherit','closed','closed','','2882-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 10:28:55','2016-06-25 17:28:55','',2882,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2882-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3116,2,'2016-06-25 10:18:08','2016-06-25 17:18:08','You know those furry things that live just above your eyelids? Yes, the eyebrows! Each eyebrow is as unique as a fingerprint--- no two are exactly alike. This helps make us all unique and fantastic creatures of nature, but it can cause a real headache if you are just learning to draw faces. There are \"tricks\" that I like to use when drawing eyebrows, and that is what I am going to share with you in this tutorial.\r\n\r\nThe eyebrows are really fascinating if you think about them. They are made of hair, but don\'t grow like the hair on our heads. They sit in an odd place, on our brow bone, which is not on our eyes, nor on our forehead. They just sit there, protecting our eyes from falling debris, right? Not exactly. Have you ever been talking to someone and known exactly what they were thinking or how they felt about what you just said? It\'s the eyebrows!\r\n\r\nIn order to show expression with eyebrows, you first need to know how to draw eyebrows realistically.\r\n<h2>Placement of the Eyebrow</h2>\r\nTo place your eyebrow correctly, use the top of the nostril crease for a guide. The innermost edge of the eyebrow should generally line up vertically (line A). The arch of the brow will peak at approximately a 45 degree angle (line B). The outer edge of the brow creates a line from the nostril crease through the outer crease of the eyelid and water line (Line C).\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2909\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"480\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-2909 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow1.jpg\" alt=\"Use the nostril crease as a guide\" width=\"480\" height=\"640\" /></a> Use the nostril crease as a guide.[/caption]\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2911 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow2.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow2\" width=\"465\" height=\"621\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext, you want to <em>very lightly</em> sketch out a basic shape for the eyebrow. If you tend to be heavy-handed, I suggest using a pencil graded 2H-HB.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2912 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3-225x300.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3\" width=\"225\" height=\"300\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Drawing Realistic Eyebrows</h2>\r\nStart adding in individual hairs. Again I suggest using a lighter grade pencil. Draw the hairs in the direction that they grow, easing up on the pressure as you lift the pencil off of the page. Think \"press and lift\". Never \"color\" in a solid value. This will make the eyebrows look cartoonish. Remember, the goal is to make the drawing as realistic as possible. You may occasionally stray outside of the outlined shape. That is okay. The outlined shape is just a guide. That is why you drew it lightly.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2913 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow3a.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow3a\" width=\"471\" height=\"627\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou can easily erase or draw over the guide as needed. Also, if the areas where your eyebrow hairs strayed from the guide bother you, you can always erase them as well. (Drawing lightly when beginning any drawing is always a good idea.) The eraser is just as valuable a drawing tool as the pencil! I prefer white acrylic erasers. Some artists prefer gum erasers, some prefer kneaded erasers and some artists grab whatever is handy! I also use an <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/electric-eraser/\">electric eraser</a>-- they are great for highlights, especially when drawing any type of hair, like drawing the eyebrow.\r\n\r\nThink about how the light is going to hit the eyebrows and add some lowlights with a softer (darker value) pencil, or more pressure. This is another place you can use your eraser for drawing, whether you have gotten too dark or just think you need to add dimension. Shading in the eyebrow hairs and then using the eraser for highlights creates a realistic thickness to the hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2914 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow4.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow4\" width=\"480\" height=\"640\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the same process for the other eyebrow in the opposite direction. Don\'t stress too much about making the eyebrows perfectly symmetrical. It seems counter-intuitive, but nothing on the human face is perfectly symmetrical.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2915 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow5.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow5\" width=\"640\" height=\"480\" /></a>\r\n\r\nIf you do draw the eyebrows in perfect symmetry, something will appear \"off\" to anyone who views the drawing. It may be subconsciously, but the viewer will know something is not right. Near symmetry is a good idea, however. There are set standards of beauty in Western culture where certain women have been considered to be an example due to their nearly symmetrical features. If you wish to see an example, consider Marilyn Monroe or Halle Berry.\r\n\r\nWhen using a real person for a reference for your drawing, you will have an easier time illustrating a more realistic symmetry. When creating a drawing of a fictional person, beware of making them too perfectly symmetrical if realism is your goal.\r\n<h2>Expressive Eyebrows</h2>\r\nAll of the previous \"tricks\" can be used when drawing eyebrows with expression. The main difference will be how much distance you put between the eyebrow and the upper eyelid. A surprised or startled eye may have a lot of space between the upper eyelid and the brow, but of course never more than the skin can possibly be stretched. You would not draw the eyebrow next to the hairline, for example. Conversely, when the person is angry or concentrating very hard on something, their eyebrows will push closer (lower) to the eyelid and slightly angle inwardly toward the inner corner of the eye.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2916 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/eyebrow6.jpg\" alt=\"eyebrow6\" width=\"473\" height=\"631\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>No Two Eyebrows Are the Same</h2>\r\nAs I mentioned before, every eyebrow is unique! The eyebrows in this article are pretty basic. The most important part of drawing any facial feature is to use a reference. Some people have very thin, light eyebrows. Some people have bushy, unruly, dark eyebrows. Some people (such as the amazing artist <a href=\"http://www.biography.com/people/frida-kahlo-9359496\">Frida Kahlo</a>) have the infamous \"uni-brow\". Every type of eyebrow will use the rule of drawing the hairs in the direction the are growing (or groomed). All hairs will use the pressure rule and will have a light source that creates darker shaded areas.\r\n\r\nAlso notice that the skin has a smoother texture than the eyebrow. I used a blending stump to make a smoother skin texture, and cast shadow to make the eyebrows look more three-dimensional. I laid down a small bit of graphite just below the eyebrow drawing and smoothed it out with the blending stump, or tortillon. I continued this shading technique around the rest of the eye for a consistent texture. Remember, when drawing the eyebrow, it is not smooth. The hair-like texture is very important and easily created by varying the pencil and eraser marks within the eyebrow.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI hope you found this tutorial on drawing eyebrows useful! Attaining mastery with anything takes a lot of practice. Practice using the techniques I have outlined here and your eyebrow drawing is sure to improve. Happy drawing!\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2919 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/christina.jpg\" alt=\"christina\" width=\"720\" height=\"720\" /></a>','Drawing Eyebrows like a Boss!','','inherit','closed','closed','','2882-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 10:18:08','2016-06-25 17:18:08','',2882,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2882-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3124,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:14','2016-06-25 23:18:14','','09 how to draw hands grabbing','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing','','','2016-06-25 16:18:14','2016-06-25 23:18:14','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3125,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:16','2016-06-25 23:18:16','','07 how to draw hands serving','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-hands-serving','','','2016-06-25 16:18:16','2016-06-25 23:18:16','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3126,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:18','2016-06-25 23:18:18','','03 how to draw hands shapes','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes','','','2016-06-25 16:18:18','2016-06-25 23:18:18','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3127,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:20','2016-06-25 23:18:20','','02 how to draw hands shapes','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes','','','2016-06-25 16:18:20','2016-06-25 23:18:20','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3129,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:25','2016-06-25 23:18:25','','05 how to draw hands serving','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-hands-serving','','','2016-06-25 16:18:25','2016-06-25 23:18:25','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3130,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:27','2016-06-25 23:18:27','','06 how to draw hands serving','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-hands-serving','','','2016-06-25 16:18:27','2016-06-25 23:18:27','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3131,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:29','2016-06-25 23:18:29','','04 how to draw hands serving','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-hands-serving','','','2016-06-25 16:18:29','2016-06-25 23:18:29','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3133,2,'2016-06-25 16:40:38','2016-06-25 23:40:38','Well it looks like the art gods do not smile upon me in this article. I love to draw and paint but I cannot stand doing hands or feet. If I can get away with not drawing them, I will. Norman Rockwell, a famous, past artist had said it best, “People can forgive anything except the face and hands.”\r\n\r\nI remember one time I was doing a painting and I had to paint the girl’s hand and I decided to paint a rock piece in front of it so that I did not have to paint it. Yes they can be difficult.\r\n\r\n“But Carlos, why take on this article if you don’t do hands?” Well the answer is pretty simple: in order to be a good and decent artist, one must know how to master a series of things, and hands are no different.\r\n\r\nIn fact, I know a fellow artist who has always painted her subjects with their back or back of their head facing the audience because she did not like painting faces period. I look at drawing/painting hands as a challenge. Not everyone can do them correctly. To master the technique of drawing the hands is a feat in itself. It cannot be ignored or not addressed. Sooner or later you’ll need to draw them to continue expressing yourself in your art. If ignored, you’ll only eliminate personal growth for yourself and in your art. With that being said, let’s bite down and learn how to draw hands.\r\n<h2>Build the Hand with Basic Shapes</h2>\r\nThe first thing that you should do is draw two circles that will be the heel of the hand followed by four columns that go from small to large as they get closer to the base. Draw two lines that will be the thumb as well. You may need to draw one or two circles under the columns to illustrate where the hand will be strategically placed. Connect the columns with lines that will end up being that hand itself as well. Also make one or two broken, uneven lines on the columns to represent the areas where the fingers bend  – don’t forget about making one straight line at the base.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3123\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nMoving right along, add some shading where necessary. In this case, shading is added to the right side illustrating that the light is coming from the left. Don’t forget to add skin folds in the hands and darken the tone on the finger folds some. Look at your hand and see how the folds are done. As you can see, they are uneven, broken, and not straight; use this as a drawing model for your picture. Also, round out the tips of the columns to portray them as the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3127\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe then need to erase all unnecessary lines in the hands themselves and off the fingers. We then take a tortillion and first smudge the folds in the hand palm and the finger folds. We then want to attack the shading that was applied to the right side of the hand to illustrate realism. Also, apply shading with the tortillion where you see fit to make the hand look real. I usually stray from the photo and add lighter or darker tones to make the picture look believable. I just don’t believe that you will be 100% accurate with a drawing compared to the original.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3126\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>A Look at Two More Hand Positions</h2>\r\nThere are literally a countless number of possible positions in which hands can form themselves, far more than can be covered in the scope of this article. Let’s look at two more drawing examples that can help you get started:\r\n<h3>The Serving Hand</h3>\r\nThis hand drawing is very simple. Simple because all the fingers are together holding in place an object that hasn’t been drawn in yet. Basically you want to start off drawing the hand blocky and add lines representing the finger folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3131\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"233\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, the object that is being held by the hand has been drawn in, as well as details like the fingernails and shading, followed by the rounding of the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3129\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe then use a tortillion to blend/smudge the shading in between the fingers, the wrist area, and also some on the fingernails.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3130\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing we do is add some detail to the object being held. Basically we just add a dark tone in some of the area but not the whole thing. We then use the tortillion again to smudge in the dark areas, leaving some areas untouched to illustrate white or lighter tone in the object. Also, I added just a bit of small tone to the tips of the fingers to show some accuracy from the picture.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3125\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h3>The Grabbing Hand</h3>\r\nNow let’s move on to the big daddy of the hand drawings. Trust me when I say this drawing wasn’t a walk in the park, but I did get it done……barely.\r\n\r\nI started off by drawing it freehand. It’s off by a little but I wasn’t worried about 100% accuracy at this stage; besides, I have time to fix it in the other stages. I also added some details to the folds of the fingers and darkened the outline, contour lines of the hand.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3124\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn this picture, you can see that I’ve added shading to the palm of the hand and some to the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3121\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last part of this picture is executing the tortillion again. I basically blended in the shaded part to make it all come together.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3122\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Drawing Other Hands</h2>\r\nAs you can see, learning how to draw hands can be a challenge, but it can be done with practice. I believe that I could not cover everything that I wanted to in just one lesson, as this post primarily focuses on opened hands in different positions. If you were to draw hands that were grasping and holding certain objects, the shading on the hands would be different. In fact, just their positioning would rearrange the lighting bouncing off of them.\r\n\r\nPlease keep in mind that when drawing the hands, start by making them into simple geometric shapes and then add detail and shading. This is actually the basic rule for everything when drawing but particularly when it comes to hands. The mobility and their flexibility make the hands a difficult subject to draw and paint but a satisfying subject when executed correctly.','Drawing the Hands','','inherit','closed','closed','','2625-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 16:40:38','2016-06-25 23:40:38','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2625-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3132,2,'2016-06-25 16:27:53','2016-06-25 23:27:53','Well it looks like the art gods do not smile upon me in this article. I love to draw and paint but I cannot stand doing hands or feet. If I can get away with not drawing them, I will. Norman Rockwell, a famous, past artist had said it best, “People can forgive anything except the face and hands.”\r\n\r\nI remember one time I was doing a painting and I had to paint the girl’s hand and I decided to paint a rock piece in front of it so that I did not have to paint it. Yes they can be difficult.\r\n\r\n“But Carlos, why take on this article if you don’t do hands?” Well the answer is pretty simple: in order to be a good and decent artist, one must know how to master a series of things, and hands are no different.\r\n\r\nIn fact, I know a fellow artist who has always painted her subjects with their back or back of their head facing the audience because she did not like painting faces period. I look at drawing/painting hands as a challenge. Not everyone can do them correctly. To master the technique of drawing the hands is a feat in itself. It cannot be ignored or not addressed. Sooner or later you’ll need to draw them to continue expressing yourself in your art. If ignored, you’ll only eliminate personal growth for yourself and in your art. With that being said, let’s bite down and learn how to draw hands.\r\n<h2>Build the Hand with Basic Shapes</h2>\r\nThe first thing that you should do is draw two circles that will be the heel of the hand followed by four columns that go from small to large as they get closer to the base. Draw two lines that will be the thumb as well. You may need to draw one or two circles under the columns to illustrate where the hand will be strategically placed. Connect the columns with lines that will end up being that hand itself as well. Also make one or two broken, uneven lines on the columns to represent the areas where the fingers bend  – don’t forget about making one straight line at the base.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3123\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nMoving right along, add some shading where necessary. In this case, shading is added to the right side illustrating that the light is coming from the left. Don’t forget to add skin folds in the hands and darken the tone on the finger folds some. Look at your hand and see how the folds are done. As you can see, they are uneven, broken, and not straight; use this as a drawing model for your picture. Also, round out the tips of the columns to portray them as the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3127\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe then need to erase all unnecessary lines in the hands themselves and off the fingers. We then take a tortillion and first smudge the folds in the hand palm and the finger folds. We then want to attack the shading that was applied to the right side of the hand to illustrate realism. Also, apply shading with the tortillion where you see fit to make the hand look real. I usually stray from the photo and add lighter or darker tones to make the picture look believable. I just don’t believe that you will be 100% accurate with a drawing compared to the original.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3126\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>A Look at Two More Hand Positions</h2>\r\nThere are literally a countless number of possible positions in which hands can form themselves, far more than can be covered in the scope of this article. Let’s look at two more drawing examples that can help you get started:\r\n<h3>The Serving Hand</h3>\r\nThis hand drawing is very simple. Simple because all the fingers are together holding in place an object that hasn’t been drawn in yet. Basically you want to start off drawing the hand blocky and add lines representing the finger folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3131\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"233\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, the object that is being held by the hand has been drawn in, as well as details like the fingernails and shading, followed by the rounding of the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3129\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe then use a tortillion to blend/smudge the shading in between the fingers, the wrist area, and also some on the fingernails.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3130\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing we do is add some detail to the object being held. Basically we just add a dark tone in some of the area but not the whole thing. We then use the tortillion again to smudge in the dark areas, leaving some areas untouched to illustrate white or lighter tone in the object. Also, I added just a bit of small tone to the tips of the fingers to show some accuracy from the picture.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3125\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h3>The Grabbing Hand</h3>\r\nNow let’s move on to the big daddy of the hand drawings. Trust me when I say this drawing wasn’t a walk in the park, but I did get it done……barely.\r\n\r\nI started off by drawing it freehand. It’s off by a little but I wasn’t worried about 100% accuracy at this stage; besides, I have time to fix it in the other stages. I also added some details to the folds of the fingers and darkened the outline, contour lines of the hand.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3124\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn this picture, you can see that I’ve added shading to the palm of the hand and some to the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3121\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last part of this picture is executing the tortillion again. I basically blended in the shaded part to make it all come together.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3122\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Drawing Other Hands</h2>\r\nAs you can see, learning how to draw hands can be a challenge, but it can be done with practice. I believe that I could not cover everything that I wanted to in just one lesson, as this post primarily focuses on opened hands in different positions. If you were to draw hands that were grasping and holding certain objects, the shading on the hands would be different. In fact, just their positioning would rearrange the lighting bouncing off of them.\r\n\r\nPlease keep in mind that when drawing the hands, start by making them into simple geometric shapes and then add detail and shading. This is actually the basic rule for everything when drawing but particularly when it comes to hands. The mobility and their flexibility make the hands a difficult subject to draw and paint but a satisfying subject when executed correctly.','Drawing the Hands','','inherit','closed','closed','','2625-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 16:27:53','2016-06-25 23:27:53','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2625-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3119,2,'2016-06-25 16:41:12','2016-06-25 23:41:12','Well it looks like the art gods do not smile upon me in this article. I love to draw and paint but I cannot stand doing hands or feet. If I can get away with not drawing them, I will. Norman Rockwell, a famous, past artist had said it best, “People can forgive anything except the face and hands.”\r\n\r\nI remember one time I was doing a painting and I had to paint the girl’s hand and I decided to paint a rock piece in front of it so that I did not have to paint it. Yes they can be difficult.\r\n\r\n“But Carlos, why take on this article if you don’t do hands?” Well the answer is pretty simple: in order to be a good and decent artist, one must know how to master a series of things, and hands are no different.\r\n\r\nIn fact, I know a fellow artist who has always painted her subjects with their back or back of their head facing the audience because she did not like painting faces period. I look at drawing/painting hands as a challenge. Not everyone can do them correctly. To master the technique of drawing the hands is a feat in itself. It cannot be ignored or not addressed. Sooner or later you’ll need to draw them to continue expressing yourself in your art. If ignored, you’ll only eliminate personal growth for yourself and in your art. With that being said, let’s bite down and learn how to draw hands.\r\n<h2>Build the Hand with Basic Shapes</h2>\r\nThe first thing that you should do is draw two circles that will be the heel of the hand followed by four columns that go from small to large as they get closer to the base. Draw two lines that will be the thumb as well. You may need to draw one or two circles under the columns to illustrate where the hand will be strategically placed. Connect the columns with lines that will end up being that hand itself as well. Also make one or two broken, uneven lines on the columns to represent the areas where the fingers bend  – don’t forget about making one straight line at the base.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3123\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nMoving right along, add some shading where necessary. In this case, shading is added to the right side illustrating that the light is coming from the left. Don’t forget to add skin folds in the hands and darken the tone on the finger folds some. Look at your hand and see how the folds are done. As you can see, they are uneven, broken, and not straight; use this as a drawing model for your picture. Also, round out the tips of the columns to portray them as the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3127\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe then need to erase all unnecessary lines in the hands themselves and off the fingers. We then take a tortillion and first smudge the folds in the hand palm and the finger folds. We then want to attack the shading that was applied to the right side of the hand to illustrate realism. Also, apply shading with the tortillion where you see fit to make the hand look real. I usually stray from the photo and add lighter or darker tones to make the picture look believable. I just don’t believe that you will be 100% accurate with a drawing compared to the original.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3126\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw hands shapes\" width=\"489\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>A Look at Two More Hand Positions</h2>\r\nThere are literally a countless number of possible positions in which hands can form themselves, far more than can be covered in the scope of this article. Let’s look at two more drawing examples that can help you get started:\r\n<h3>The Serving Hand</h3>\r\nThis hand drawing is very simple. Simple because all the fingers are together holding in place an object that hasn’t been drawn in yet. Basically you want to start off drawing the hand blocky and add lines representing the finger folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3131\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"233\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAs you can see, the object that is being held by the hand has been drawn in, as well as details like the fingernails and shading, followed by the rounding of the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3129\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWe then use a tortillion to blend/smudge the shading in between the fingers, the wrist area, and also some on the fingernails.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3130\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last thing we do is add some detail to the object being held. Basically we just add a dark tone in some of the area but not the whole thing. We then use the tortillion again to smudge in the dark areas, leaving some areas untouched to illustrate white or lighter tone in the object. Also, I added just a bit of small tone to the tips of the fingers to show some accuracy from the picture.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3125\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/07-how-to-draw-hands-serving.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw hands serving\" width=\"600\" height=\"348\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h3>The Grabbing Hand</h3>\r\nNow let’s move on to the big daddy of the hand drawings. Trust me when I say this drawing wasn’t a walk in the park, but I did get it done……barely.\r\n\r\nI started off by drawing it freehand. It’s off by a little but I wasn’t worried about 100% accuracy at this stage; besides, I have time to fix it in the other stages. I also added some details to the folds of the fingers and darkened the outline, contour lines of the hand.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3124\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/09-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn this picture, you can see that I’ve added shading to the palm of the hand and some to the fingers.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3121\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last part of this picture is executing the tortillion again. I basically blended in the shaded part to make it all come together.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3122\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw hands grabbing\" width=\"548\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Drawing Other Hands</h2>\r\nAs you can see, learning how to draw hands can be a challenge, but it can be done with practice. I believe that I could not cover everything that I wanted to in just one lesson, as this post primarily focuses on opened hands in different positions. If you were to draw hands that were grasping and holding certain objects, the shading on the hands would be different. In fact, just their positioning would rearrange the lighting bouncing off of them.\r\n\r\nPlease keep in mind that when drawing the hands, start by making them into simple geometric shapes and then add detail and shading. This is actually the basic rule for everything when drawing but particularly when it comes to hands. The mobility and their flexibility make the hands a difficult subject to draw and paint but a satisfying subject when executed correctly.','Drawing the Hands','','inherit','closed','closed','','2625-autosave-v1','','','2016-06-25 16:41:12','2016-06-25 23:41:12','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2625-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3123,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:12','2016-06-25 23:18:12','','01 how to draw hands shapes','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes','','','2016-06-25 16:18:12','2016-06-25 23:18:12','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-how-to-draw-hands-shapes.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3122,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:10','2016-06-25 23:18:10','','11 how to draw hands grabbing','','inherit','open','closed','','11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing','','','2016-06-25 16:18:10','2016-06-25 23:18:10','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/11-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3121,2,'2016-06-25 16:18:07','2016-06-25 23:18:07','','10 how to draw hands grabbing','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing','','','2016-06-25 16:18:07','2016-06-25 23:18:07','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/10-how-to-draw-hands-grabbing.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3120,2,'2016-06-25 11:43:20','2016-06-25 18:43:20','Well it looks like the art gods do not smile upon me in this article. I love to draw and paint but I cannot stand doing hands or feet. If I can get away with not drawing them, I will. Norman Rockwell, a famous, past artist had said it best, “People can forgive anything except the face and hands.”\r\n\r\nI remember one time I was doing a painting and I had to paint the girl’s hand and I decided to paint a rock piece in front of it so that I did not have to paint it. Yes they can be difficult.\r\n\r\n“But Carlos, why take on this article if you don’t do hands?” Well the answer is pretty simple: in order to be a good and decent artist, one must know how to master a series of things, and hands are no different.\r\n\r\nIn fact, I know a fellow artist who has always painted her subjects with their back or back of their head facing the audience because she did not like painting faces period. I look at drawing/painting hands as a challenge. Not everyone can do them correctly. To master the technique of drawing the hands is a feat in itself. It cannot be ignored or not addressed. Sooner or later you’ll need to draw them to continue expressing yourself in your art. If ignored, you’ll only eliminate personal growth for yourself and in your art. With that being said, let’s bite down and learn how to draw hands.\r\n<h2>Build the Hand with Basic Shapes</h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2634 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0010-245x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0010\" width=\"245\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nThe first thing that you should do is draw two circles that will be the heel of the hand followed by four columns that go from small to large as they get closer to the base. Draw two lines that will be the thumb as well. You may need to draw one or two circles under the columns to illustrate where the hand will be strategically placed. Connect the columns with lines that will end up being that hand itself as well. Also make one or two broken, uneven lines on the columns to represent the areas where the fingers bend  – don’t forget about making one straight line at the base.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2635 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0011-245x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0011\" width=\"245\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nMoving right along, add some shading where necessary. In this case, shading is added to the right side illustrating that the light is coming from the left. Don’t forget to add skin folds in the hands and darken the tone on the finger folds some. Look at your hand and see how the folds are done. As you can see, they are uneven, broken, and not straight; use this as a drawing model for your picture. Also, round out the tips of the columns to portray them as the tips of the fingers.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2636 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0012-245x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0012\" width=\"245\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\nWe then need to erase all unnecessary lines in the hands themselves and off the fingers. We then take a tortillion and first smudge the folds in the hand palm and the finger folds. We then want to attack the shading that was applied to the right side of the hand to illustrate realism. Also, apply shading with the tortillion where you see fit to make the hand look real. I usually stray from the photo and add lighter or darker tones to make the picture look believable. I just don’t believe that you will be 100% accurate with a drawing compared to the original.\r\n<h2>A Look at Two More Hand Positions</h2>\r\nThere are literally a countless number of possible positions in which hands can form themselves, far more than can be covered in the scope of this article. Let’s look at two more drawing examples that can help you get started:\r\n<h3>The Serving Hand</h3>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2630 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0005-300x117.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"300\" height=\"117\" />\r\n\r\nThis hand drawing is very simple. Simple because all the fingers are together holding in place an object that hasn’t been drawn in yet. Basically you want to start off drawing the hand blocky and add lines representing the finger folds.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2631 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0006-300x174.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"300\" height=\"174\" />\r\n\r\nAs you can see, the object that is being held by the hand has been drawn in, as well as details like the fingernails and shading, followed by the rounding of the tips of the fingers.<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2632 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0008-300x174.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0008\" width=\"300\" height=\"174\" />\r\n\r\nWe then use a tortillion to blend/smudge the shading in between the fingers, the wrist area, and also some on the fingernails.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2633 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0009-300x174.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0009\" width=\"300\" height=\"174\" />\r\n\r\nThe last thing we do is add some detail to the object being held. Basically we just add a dark tone in some of the area but not the whole thing. We then use the tortillion again to smudge in the dark areas, leaving some areas untouched to illustrate white or lighter tone in the object. Also, I added just a bit of small tone to the tips of the fingers to show some accuracy from the picture.\r\n<h3>The Grabbing Hand</h3>\r\nNow let’s move on to the big daddy of the hand drawings. Trust me when I say this drawing wasn’t a walk in the park, but I did get it done……barely.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2626 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0001-274x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001\" width=\"274\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI started off by drawing it freehand. It’s off by a little but I wasn’t worried about 100% accuracy at this stage; besides, I have time to fix it in the other stages.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2627 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0002-274x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"274\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHere I added some details to the folds of the fingers and darkened the outline, contour lines of the hand.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2628 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0003-274x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"274\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn this picture, you can see that I’ve added shading to the palm of the hand and some to the fingers.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2629 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/Scan0004-274x300.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"274\" height=\"300\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe last part of this picture is executing the tortillion again. I basically blended in the shaded part to make it all come together.\r\n<h2>Drawing Other Hands</h2>\r\nAs you can see, learning how to draw hands can be a challenge, but it can be done with practice. I believe that I could not cover everything that I wanted to in just one lesson, as this post primarily focuses on opened hands in different positions. If you were to draw hands that were grasping and holding certain objects, the shading on the hands would be different. In fact, just their positioning would rearrange the lighting bouncing off of them.\r\n\r\nPlease keep in mind that when drawing the hands, start by making them into simple geometric shapes and then add detail and shading. This is actually the basic rule for everything when drawing but particularly when it comes to hands. The mobility and their flexibility make the hands a difficult subject to draw and paint but a satisfying subject when executed correctly.','Drawing the Hands','','inherit','closed','closed','','2625-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 11:43:20','2016-06-25 18:43:20','',2625,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2625-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3134,2,'2016-06-26 04:46:42','2016-06-26 11:46:42','Before you start drawing, it helps to plan your ideas. Composition is the idea of setting up your drawing. How many ideas, people, and objects do you want to use in your drawing?\r\n\r\nIn the drawing below, I thought to create a small still-frame of a scene. In the drawing of the two people, I wanted to show how you can create mood, emotion, and action.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/composition.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3136\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/composition.jpg\" alt=\"composition\" width=\"800\" height=\"480\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFirst, consider how the two girls are sitting together and the body language that they may be using. The girl lying down is relaxed with her head back. This is a classic pose for someone sleeping, hurt, or perhaps dead. The other girl looking down on her further explains sadness, perhaps remorse, or maybe just tiredness. The girls are similar in age and size, so this would suggest that they may be sisters or close friends.\r\n\r\nThere is a lot one could tell from this picture or may feel. Creating a compositing is a great way to stir the imagination.\r\n\r\n<strong>Structure:</strong> Looking for a frame, imagine yourself as a photographer. It’s the same idea without a view box. Instead, create your own view box, using a mix of what you see and what you want to draw. Create space between objects by finding a fixed point and compare the size of one object to other objects.\r\n\r\n<strong>Setup:</strong> Once you have an idea of your frame, you may want to organize your drawing, change position lighting, and how things are sitting in the space you have. Creating a setup with models can take time. Try multiple times to find what looks better along with more than one sitting with the same pose in order to draw what you have. Alternately, you can do the same thing- take a photo and draw what you see from the photo, or use a photo that was already taken.\r\n\r\n<strong>Background:</strong> When setting up a drawing, consider more than what you are drawing. Background gives depth and realism along with creating a set that is frozen in time.\r\n\r\n<strong>Foreground:</strong> Sometimes you have space before what you are drawing. It helps to know what to do with this space. If you are using the space, it helps create perspective.\r\n\r\n<strong>Space:</strong> Structure and space are similar; however, space is what is not in the frame. Structure is what is in the frame.\r\n\r\n<strong>Point of view:</strong> Once you have everything set up, perhaps you want to change where you are looking from in order to get a different view of the same setting.\r\n\r\n<strong>Perspective:</strong> Along with point of view, background and foreground can help create space and reality in a drawing. For example, the human body looking more round instead of flat will help create reality. One can do this by creating directional shading.\r\n\r\n<strong>Lighting:</strong> Try to think about what light you are using. This is more important if you choose to use contrast, or perhaps you want a more mid-town lighting effect.\r\n\r\n<strong>Location:</strong> Where is your setting going to be? Outside, inside, in a city or in the woods?\r\n\r\n<strong>Frame:</strong> What type of frame are you going to use? Portrait, landscape or something else?\r\n\r\n<strong>Idea:</strong> What is happening in your setting? What story do you want to tell with one picture?','What to Consider When Making a Composition','','inherit','closed','closed','','2894-autosave-v1','','','2016-06-26 04:46:42','2016-06-26 11:46:42','',2894,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2894-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3137,2,'2016-06-26 04:47:09','2016-06-26 11:47:09','Before you start drawing, it helps to plan your ideas. Composition is the idea of setting up your drawing. How many ideas, people, and objects do you want to use in your drawing?\r\n\r\nIn the drawing below, I thought to create a small still-frame of a scene. In the drawing of the two people, I wanted to show how you can create mood, emotion, and action.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/composition.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3136\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/composition.jpg\" alt=\"composition\" width=\"800\" height=\"480\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nFirst, consider how the two girls are sitting together and the body language that they may be using. The girl lying down is relaxed with her head back. This is a classic pose for someone sleeping, hurt, or perhaps dead. The other girl looking down on her further explains sadness, perhaps remorse, or maybe just tiredness. The girls are similar in age and size, so this would suggest that they may be sisters or close friends.\r\n\r\nThere is a lot one could tell from this picture or may feel. Creating a compositing is a great way to stir the imagination.\r\n\r\n<strong>Structure:</strong> Looking for a frame, imagine yourself as a photographer. It’s the same idea without a view box. Instead, create your own view box, using a mix of what you see and what you want to draw. Create space between objects by finding a fixed point and compare the size of one object to other objects.\r\n\r\n<strong>Setup:</strong> Once you have an idea of your frame, you may want to organize your drawing, change position lighting, and how things are sitting in the space you have. Creating a setup with models can take time. Try multiple times to find what looks better along with more than one sitting with the same pose in order to draw what you have. Alternately, you can do the same thing- take a photo and draw what you see from the photo, or use a photo that was already taken.\r\n\r\n<strong>Background:</strong> When setting up a drawing, consider more than what you are drawing. Background gives depth and realism along with creating a set that is frozen in time.\r\n\r\n<strong>Foreground:</strong> Sometimes you have space before what you are drawing. It helps to know what to do with this space. If you are using the space, it helps create perspective.\r\n\r\n<strong>Space:</strong> Structure and space are similar; however, space is what is not in the frame. Structure is what is in the frame.\r\n\r\n<strong>Point of view:</strong> Once you have everything set up, perhaps you want to change where you are looking from in order to get a different view of the same setting.\r\n\r\n<strong>Perspective:</strong> Along with point of view, background and foreground can help create space and reality in a drawing. For example, the human body looking more round instead of flat will help create reality. One can do this by creating directional shading.\r\n\r\n<strong>Lighting:</strong> Try to think about what light you are using. This is more important if you choose to use contrast, or perhaps you want a more mid-town lighting effect.\r\n\r\n<strong>Location:</strong> Where is your setting going to be? Outside, inside, in a city or in the woods?\r\n\r\n<strong>Frame:</strong> What type of frame are you going to use? Portrait, landscape or something else?\r\n\r\n<strong>Idea:</strong> What is happening in your setting? What story do you want to tell with one picture?','What to Consider When Making a Composition','','inherit','closed','closed','','2894-revision-v1','','','2016-06-26 04:47:09','2016-06-26 11:47:09','',2894,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2894-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3135,2,'2016-06-25 20:43:28','2016-06-26 03:43:28','Before you start drawing, it helps to plan your ideas. Composition is the idea of setting up your drawing. How many ideas, people, and objects do you want to use in your drawing?\r\n\r\nIn the drawing below, I thought to create a small still-frame of a scene. In the drawing of the two people, I wanted to show how you can create mood, emotion, and action.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2896\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/2-1-300x180.jpg\" alt=\"2\" width=\"300\" height=\"180\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2897\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/3-1-300x180.jpg\" alt=\"3\" width=\"300\" height=\"180\" />\r\n\r\nFirst, consider how the two girls are sitting together and the body language that they may be using. The girl lying down is relaxed with her head back. This is a classic pose for someone sleeping, hurt, or perhaps dead. The other girl looking down on her further explains sadness, perhaps remorse, or maybe just tiredness. The girls are similar in age and size, so this would suggest that they may be sisters or close friends.\r\n\r\nThere is a lot one could tell from this picture or may feel. Creating a compositing is a great way to stir the imagination.*****\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2900\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/6-1-300x180.jpg\" alt=\"6\" width=\"300\" height=\"180\" />\r\n\r\nStructure: Looking for a frame, imagine yourself a photographer. It’s the same idea without a view box. Instead, create your own view box, using a mix of what you see and what you want to draw. Create space between objects by finding a fix point and compare size from object to other objects.\r\n\r\nSetup: Once you have an idea of your frame, you may want to organize your drawing, change position lighting, and how things are sitting in the space you have. Creating set up with models can take time. Multiple tries of finding what looks better along with more than one sitting with the same pose in order to draw what you have. Alternately, you can do the same thing- take a photo and draw what you see from the photo, or a photo that was already taken.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2901\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/7-300x180.jpg\" alt=\"7\" width=\"300\" height=\"180\" />\r\n\r\n<img class=\"alignnone size-medium wp-image-2903\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/9-300x180.jpg\" alt=\"9\" width=\"300\" height=\"180\" />\r\n\r\nBackground: When setting up a drawing, consider more then what you are drawing. Background gives depth and realism along with creating a set that is frozen in time.\r\n\r\nForeground: Sometimes you have space before what you are drawing, knowing what to do with this space. Or if you are using the space, it helps create perspective.\r\n\r\nSpace: Structure and space are similar; however, space is what is not in the frame. Structure is what is in the frame.\r\n\r\nPoint of view: Once you have everything set up, perhaps you want to change where you are looking from in order to get a different view of the same setting.\r\n\r\nPerspective: Along with point of view, background and foreground repetitive can help create space and reality in a drawing. For example, the human body looking more round instead of flat will help create reality. One can do this by creating directional shading.\r\n\r\nLighting: Try to think about what light you are using. This is more important if you choose to use contrast, or perhaps you want a more mid-town lighting effect.\r\n\r\nLocation: Where is your setting going to be? Outside, inside, in a city or in the woods?\r\n\r\nFrame: What type of frame are you going to use? Portrait, landscape or something else?\r\n\r\nIdea: What is happening in your setting? What story do you want to tell with one picture?','How to Draw a Composition','','inherit','closed','closed','','2894-revision-v1','','','2016-06-25 20:43:28','2016-06-26 03:43:28','',2894,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2894-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3147,2,'2016-06-26 12:03:09','2016-06-26 19:03:09','We all like to look at baby pictures, but that doesn\'t mean we all like to draw them!\r\n\r\nWe all know how much different it can be to draw children rather than adults. If the thought of drawing a child intimidates you, then you are likely even more hesitant to draw a subject that is a baby.\r\n\r\nIt is true that there are significant differences in facial and body proportions between adults and children. There are even more differences between adults and babies. However, those differences do not have to stop you from drawing a baby every now and then. In fact, you will soon see that drawing a baby can have more similarities to drawing an adult that differences.\r\n\r\nIn this tutorial, we will ease into the task of drawing a baby with a simple, less-intimidating subject. We will stay away from crying babies or playing babies with their arms and legs wobbling wildly in every direction. We will walk through how to make a drawing of a baby sleeping.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2617\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/drawing-of-a-baby-reference.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2617\"><img class=\"wp-image-2617\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/drawing-of-a-baby-reference-300x200.jpg\" alt=\" © Santos06 | Dreamstime.com\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/santos06_info\">Santos06</a> | <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\nAs you can see, there is little need to worry too much about body proportions in this example. Also, since our little guy\'s eyes are closed, it will make drawing him that much easier. As we go along, I will point out some key facial proportions to keep in mind when drawing babies, as well as how they compare to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">facial proportions of adults</a>.\r\n<h2>Drawing the Baby\'s Face</h2>\r\nStart by making some simple guidelines. Use the reference photograph above to very lightly sketch the outline of the baby\'s head, arm, and hands, as seen below. Try to get the angle of the head to closely match. You should also place some guidelines for the facial features.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/01-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3145\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/01-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 drawing of a baby sleeping guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"427\" /></a>\r\n\r\nNow here\'s where having a reference photograph comes in handy...when we talk baby proportions! You have likely noticed that the head of a baby is much more round than that of an adult\'s. Still, as you can see from carefully studying our reference photo, our baby\'s head is not a perfect circle. It is still an oval shape. It is just a more circular oval than you would make for an adult.\r\n\r\nMaybe you have also heard that a baby\'s eyes are lower down on the head than an adult\'s eyes. While usually true, this is barely noticeable in our example. The eyeline is placed just like an adult\'s - halfway between the top of the head and the chin.\r\n\r\nOne key difference to pay attention to is the much shorter nose of a baby. For this reason, you can\'t put the nose line halfway between the eyes and the chin. It needs to be closer to the eyes.\r\n\r\nSpeaking of the eyes, let\'s draw them next. The eyes are usually the most prominent feature of a baby, since they are so large and round. Since they are so prominent, you might also find them to be the most challenging part of drawing a baby. Luckily, since our baby is sleeping, drawing his eyes will be a piece of cake.\r\n\r\nLightly sketch the curved eyelids and subtle wrinkles around them. Draw a light line bridging the eyes together in the middle. The eyebrows should be barely visible. The same goes for the eyelashes. Make them as short as you possibly can. This task is made easier with a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/mechanical-pencil/\">mechanical pencil</a> for drawing those fine, thin lines. You can also use the mechanical pencil for the entire drawing, as I did.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/02-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3144\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/02-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-eyes.jpg\" alt=\"02 drawing of a baby sleeping eyes\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nRemember that a baby\'s nose is very short compared to an adult\'s. For this reason, don\'t leave much room for the bridge of the nose. Just focus on the tip and nostrils. I began by drawing a circle for the ball of the nose. The wings of the nostrils branch out from this circle but do not extend past the inner corners of the eyes.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/03-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3143\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/03-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-nose.jpg\" alt=\"03 drawing of a baby sleeping nose\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nhere next\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/04-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-mouth.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3139\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/04-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-mouth.jpg\" alt=\"04 drawing of a baby sleeping mouth\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/05-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-face.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3142\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/05-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-face.jpg\" alt=\"05 drawing of a baby sleeping face\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/06-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3140\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/06-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-hair.jpg\" alt=\"06 drawing of a baby sleeping hair\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/07-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-sleeve.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3141\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/07-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-sleeve.jpg\" alt=\"07 drawing of a baby sleeping sleeve\" width=\"600\" height=\"429\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3138\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping.jpg\" alt=\"drawing of a baby sleeping\" width=\"800\" height=\"573\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nTaking on those subjects that you normally want to run away from is a sure-fire way to grow as an artist. Hopefully this tutorial will motivate you to draw even more baby pictures!','How to Make a Drawing of a Baby Sleeping','','inherit','closed','closed','','3033-revision-v1','','','2016-06-26 12:03:09','2016-06-26 19:03:09','',3033,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3033-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3148,2,'2016-06-26 15:40:55','2016-06-26 22:40:55','We all like to look at baby pictures, but that doesn\'t mean we all like to draw them!\r\n\r\nWe all know how much different it can be to draw children rather than adults. If the thought of drawing a child intimidates you, then you are likely even more hesitant to draw a subject that is a baby.\r\n\r\nIt is true that there are significant differences in facial and body proportions between adults and children. There are even more differences between adults and babies. However, those differences do not have to stop you from drawing a baby every now and then. In fact, you will soon see that drawing a baby can have more similarities to drawing an adult that differences.\r\n\r\nIn this tutorial, we will ease into the task of drawing a baby with a simple, less-intimidating subject. We will stay away from crying babies or playing babies with their arms and legs wobbling wildly in every direction. We will walk through how to make a drawing of a baby sleeping.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2617\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/drawing-of-a-baby-reference.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2617\"><img class=\"wp-image-2617\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/drawing-of-a-baby-reference-300x200.jpg\" alt=\" © Santos06 | Dreamstime.com\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/santos06_info\">Santos06</a> | <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\nAs you can see, there is little need to worry too much about body proportions in this example. Also, since our little guy\'s eyes are closed, it will make drawing him that much easier. As we go along, I will point out some key facial proportions to keep in mind when drawing babies, as well as how they compare to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">facial proportions of adults</a>.\r\n<h2>Drawing the Baby\'s Face</h2>\r\nStart by making some simple guidelines. Use the reference photograph above to very lightly sketch the outline of the baby\'s head, arm, and hands, as seen below. Try to get the angle of the head to closely match. You should also place some guidelines for the facial features.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/01-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3145\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/01-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 drawing of a baby sleeping guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"427\" /></a>\r\n\r\nNow here\'s where having a reference photograph comes in handy...when we talk baby proportions! You have likely noticed that the head of a baby is much more round than that of an adult\'s. Still, as you can see from carefully studying our reference photo, our baby\'s head is not a perfect circle. It is still an oval shape. It is just a more circular oval than you would make for an adult.\r\n\r\nMaybe you have also heard that a baby\'s eyes are lower down on the head than an adult\'s eyes. While usually true, this is barely noticeable in our example. The eyeline is placed just like an adult\'s - halfway between the top of the head and the chin.\r\n\r\nOne key difference to pay attention to is the much shorter nose of a baby. For this reason, you can\'t put the nose line halfway between the eyes and the chin. It needs to be closer to the eyes.\r\n\r\nSpeaking of the eyes, let\'s draw them next. The eyes are usually the most prominent feature of a baby, since they are so large and round. Since they are so prominent, you might also find them to be the most challenging part of drawing a baby. Luckily, since our baby is sleeping, drawing his eyes will be a piece of cake.\r\n\r\nLightly sketch the curved eyelids and subtle wrinkles around them. Draw a light line bridging the eyes together in the middle. The eyebrows should be barely visible. The same goes for the eyelashes. Make them as short as you possibly can. This task is made easier with a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/mechanical-pencil/\">mechanical pencil</a> for drawing those fine, thin lines. You can also use the mechanical pencil for the entire drawing, as I did.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/02-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3144\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/02-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-eyes.jpg\" alt=\"02 drawing of a baby sleeping eyes\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nRemember that a baby\'s nose is very short compared to an adult\'s. For this reason, don\'t leave much room for the bridge of the nose. Just focus on the tip and nostrils. I began by drawing a circle for the ball of the nose. The wings of the nostrils branch out from this circle but do not extend past the inner corners of the eyes.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/03-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3143\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/03-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-nose.jpg\" alt=\"03 drawing of a baby sleeping nose\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext draw the mouth, partly open to reflect the baby breathing in his sleep. A baby\'s mouth is proportionately smaller than an adult\'s; therefore, the corners of the mouth may not necessarily line up with the center of each eye. They will actually be closer to the inner corners of the eyes. Lightly sketch vertical lines on the upper and lower lips. Since the baby is sleeping on his left cheek, you should see a bit of a crease where the upper lip meets that cheek.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/04-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-mouth.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3139\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/04-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-mouth.jpg\" alt=\"04 drawing of a baby sleeping mouth\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNow it is time to better define the outline of the face. Remember earlier when we said babies have a round head? Think \"round and circular\" as you trace over the contour of the baby\'s cheeks. Place the ear between the guidelines for the eyes and the mouth (not the nose).\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/05-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-face.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3142\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/05-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-face.jpg\" alt=\"05 drawing of a baby sleeping face\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Up the Final Details</h2>\r\nOur baby subject does not have very much hair. Sketch a fuzzy outline along the top of the head where the hair is slightly fuller. Draw fine lines to show the thinner patches of hair that are closer to the face. Since this pretty much completes the baby\'s face, now would be a good time to also erase your guidelines.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/06-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3140\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/06-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-hair.jpg\" alt=\"06 drawing of a baby sleeping hair\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nMoving along, the next part of the drawing is the baby\'s sleeve. I suggest that you look at the reference photo and try to sketch the folds of the fabric as best as you can. If you need extra help drawing the clothing, you can read a previous post I wrote about <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">how to draw clothes</a> along with the various types of folds found in them.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/07-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-sleeve.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3141\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/07-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-sleeve.jpg\" alt=\"07 drawing of a baby sleeping sleeve\" width=\"600\" height=\"429\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe final step is to draw the hands and indicate the soft bedding on which the baby is resting. I opted to not make the ribbed, parallel line pattern of the bedding from the reference photo. However, I did pay close attention to the reference photo to try and keep the size of the hands properly proportioned to the face. I kept having the urge to draw them smaller, since the arms are so small compared to the head.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3138\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping.jpg\" alt=\"drawing of a baby sleeping\" width=\"800\" height=\"573\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Baby Proportions to Remember</h2>\r\nTo sum up a few comparisons that were covered in this lesson between baby and adult proportions:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Babies have very round, almost circular heads. However, they are still oval-shaped. The oval shape of adult heads are much more obvious.</li>\r\n 	<li>When compared <em>proportionately</em> to the rest of the body, the head of a baby is larger than an adult\'s head.</li>\r\n 	<li>The eyes of a baby are <em>slightly</em> lower on the head than an adult\'s, but they are still pretty much centered between the top of the head and the chin.</li>\r\n 	<li>The nose of a baby is shorter than an adult\'s.</li>\r\n 	<li>The mouth is smaller and the corners do not necessarily line up with the centers of the eyes.</li>\r\n 	<li>The bottom of the ears may line up more with the mouth than the nose.</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nAs always, these are general guidelines that may not apply to every baby subject perfectly. Nevertheless, maybe being familiar with them will make you a little more confident the next time you draw a person who\'s favorite words are \"goo goo ga ga\"!\r\n\r\nRemember, taking on those subjects that you normally want to run away from is a sure-fire way to grow as an artist. Hopefully this tutorial will motivate you to draw even more baby pictures!','How to Make a Drawing of a Baby Sleeping','','inherit','closed','closed','','3033-revision-v1','','','2016-06-26 15:40:55','2016-06-26 22:40:55','',3033,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3033-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3149,2,'2016-06-26 15:43:32','2016-06-26 22:43:32','We all like to look at baby pictures, but that doesn\'t mean we all like to draw them!\r\n\r\nWe all know how much different it can be to draw children rather than adults. If the thought of drawing a child intimidates you, then you are likely even more hesitant to draw a subject that is a baby.\r\n\r\nIt is true that there are significant differences in facial and body proportions between adults and children. There are even more differences between adults and babies. However, those differences do not have to stop you from drawing a baby every now and then. In fact, you will soon see that drawing a baby can have more similarities to drawing an adult that differences.\r\n\r\nIn this tutorial, we will ease into the task of drawing a baby with a simple, less-intimidating subject. We will stay away from crying babies or playing babies with their arms and legs wobbling wildly in every direction. We will walk through how to make a drawing of a baby sleeping.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2617\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"600\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/drawing-of-a-baby-reference.jpg\" rel=\"attachment wp-att-2617\"><img class=\"wp-image-2617\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/01/drawing-of-a-baby-reference-300x200.jpg\" alt=\" © Santos06 | Dreamstime.com\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/santos06_info\">Santos06</a> | <a href=\"http://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\nAs you can see, there is little need to worry too much about body proportions in this example. Also, since our little guy\'s eyes are closed, it will make drawing him that much easier. As we go along, I will point out some key facial proportions to keep in mind when drawing babies, as well as how they compare to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">facial proportions of adults</a>.\r\n<h2>Drawing the Baby\'s Face</h2>\r\nStart by making some simple guidelines. Use the reference photograph above to very lightly sketch the outline of the baby\'s head, arm, and hands, as seen below. Try to get the angle of the head to closely match. You should also place some guidelines for the facial features.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/01-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3145\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/01-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 drawing of a baby sleeping guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"427\" /></a>\r\n\r\nNow here\'s where having a reference photograph comes in handy...when we talk baby proportions! You have likely noticed that the head of a baby is much more round than that of an adult\'s. Still, as you can see from carefully studying our reference photo, our baby\'s head is not a perfect circle. It is still an oval shape. It is just a more circular oval than you would make for an adult.\r\n\r\nMaybe you have also heard that a baby\'s eyes are lower down on the head than an adult\'s eyes. While usually true, this is barely noticeable in our example. The eyeline is placed just like an adult\'s - halfway between the top of the head and the chin.\r\n\r\nOne key difference to pay attention to is the much shorter nose of a baby. For this reason, you can\'t put the nose line halfway between the eyes and the chin. It needs to be closer to the eyes.\r\n\r\nSpeaking of the eyes, let\'s draw them next. The eyes are usually the most prominent feature of a baby, since they are so large and round. Since they are so prominent, you might also find them to be the most challenging part of drawing a baby. Luckily, since our baby is sleeping, drawing his eyes will be a piece of cake.\r\n\r\nLightly sketch the curved eyelids and subtle wrinkles around them. Draw a light line bridging the eyes together in the middle. The eyebrows should be barely visible. The same goes for the eyelashes. Make them as short as you possibly can. This task is made easier with a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/mechanical-pencil/\">mechanical pencil</a> for drawing those fine, thin lines. You can also use the mechanical pencil for the entire drawing, as I did.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/02-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-eyes.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3144\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/02-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-eyes.jpg\" alt=\"02 drawing of a baby sleeping eyes\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nRemember that a baby\'s nose is very short compared to an adult\'s. For this reason, don\'t leave much room for the bridge of the nose. Just focus on the tip and nostrils. I began by drawing a circle for the ball of the nose. The wings of the nostrils branch out from this circle but do not extend past the inner corners of the eyes.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/03-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-nose.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3143\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/03-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-nose.jpg\" alt=\"03 drawing of a baby sleeping nose\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNext draw the mouth, partly open to reflect the baby breathing in his sleep. A baby\'s mouth is proportionately smaller than an adult\'s; therefore, the corners of the mouth may not necessarily line up with the center of each eye. They will actually be closer to the inner corners of the eyes. Lightly sketch vertical lines on the upper and lower lips. Since the baby is sleeping on his left cheek, you should see a bit of a crease where the upper lip meets that cheek.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/04-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-mouth.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3139\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/04-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-mouth.jpg\" alt=\"04 drawing of a baby sleeping mouth\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nNow it is time to better define the outline of the face. Remember earlier when we said babies have a round head? Think \"round and circular\" as you trace over the contour of the baby\'s cheeks. Place the ear between the guidelines for the eyes and the mouth (not the nose).\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/05-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-face.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3142\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/05-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-face.jpg\" alt=\"05 drawing of a baby sleeping face\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Up the Final Details</h2>\r\nOur baby subject does not have very much hair. Sketch a fuzzy outline along the top of the head where the hair is slightly fuller. Draw fine lines to show the thinner patches of hair that are closer to the face. Since this pretty much completes the baby\'s face, now would be a good time to also erase your guidelines.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/06-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-hair.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3140\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/06-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-hair.jpg\" alt=\"06 drawing of a baby sleeping hair\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nMoving along, the next part of the drawing is the baby\'s sleeve. I suggest that you look at the reference photo and try to sketch the folds of the fabric as best as you can. If you need extra help drawing the clothing, you can read a previous post I wrote about <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">how to draw clothes</a> along with the various types of folds found in them.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/07-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-sleeve.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3141\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/07-drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping-sleeve.jpg\" alt=\"07 drawing of a baby sleeping sleeve\" width=\"600\" height=\"429\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThe final step is to draw the hands and indicate the soft bedding on which the baby is resting. I opted to not make the ribbed, parallel line pattern of the bedding from the reference photo. However, I did pay close attention to the reference photo to try and keep the size of the hands properly proportioned to the face. I kept having the urge to draw them smaller, since the arms are so small compared to the head.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3138\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/drawing-of-a-baby-sleeping.jpg\" alt=\"drawing of a baby sleeping\" width=\"800\" height=\"573\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Baby Proportions to Remember</h2>\r\nTo sum up a few comparisons that were covered in this lesson between baby and adult proportions:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Babies have very round, almost circular heads. However, they are still oval-shaped. The oval shape of adult heads are much more obvious.</li>\r\n 	<li>When compared <em>proportionately</em> to the rest of the body, the head of a baby is larger than an adult\'s head.</li>\r\n 	<li>The eyes of a baby are <em>slightly</em> lower on the head than an adult\'s, but they are still pretty much centered between the top of the head and the chin.</li>\r\n 	<li>The nose of a baby is shorter than an adult\'s.</li>\r\n 	<li>The mouth is smaller and the corners do not necessarily line up with the centers of the eyes.</li>\r\n 	<li>The bottom of the ears may line up more with the mouth than the nose.</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nAs always, these are general guidelines that may not apply to every baby subject perfectly. Nevertheless, maybe being familiar with them will make you a little more confident the next time you draw a person who\'s favorite words are \"goo goo ga ga\".\r\n\r\nRemember, taking on those subjects that you normally want to run away from is a sure-fire way to grow as an artist. Hopefully this tutorial will motivate you to draw even more baby pictures!','How to Make a Drawing of a Baby Sleeping','','inherit','closed','closed','','3033-revision-v1','','','2016-06-26 15:43:32','2016-06-26 22:43:32','',3033,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3033-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3150,2,'2016-07-30 02:47:56','2016-07-30 09:47:56','<center><iframe src=\"https://www.youtube.com/embed/dzXZBIyYRbE?rel=0\" width=\"640\" height=\"360\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>Well-known for his starring role in the hit Broadway musical <em>Hamilton</em>, Lin-Manuel Miranda has gotten a lot of buzz this year. Since it appears that Miranda has now left the <em>Hamilton</em> stage to pursue other opportunities, I thought it fitting to bid farewell with a speed drawing.\r\n\r\nI was originally planning to just do a quick sketch, but shortly into it I decided to add a bit more detail and shading with a tortillion. This entire drawing was done with a regular graphite 2B pencil. I didn\'t spend as much time on this as I would have for a more realistic portrait drawing, but it still gives you a shortened version of the process.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3151\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"547\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\"><img class=\"size-full wp-image-3151\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\" alt=\"© Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo\" width=\"547\" height=\"800\" /></a> © Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/editorial-image-lin-manuel-miranda-wins-th-annual-tonys-multi-talented-holds-his-precious-statuette-winners-media-room-jcc-image72914600#res3619261\">Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo</a>[/caption]\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3154\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg\" alt=\"lin-manuel miranda\" width=\"575\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','Speed Drawing of Lin-Manuel Miranda','','publish','open','open','','speed-drawing-of-lin-manuel-miranda','','','2016-06-29 11:16:20','2016-06-29 18:16:20','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3150',0,'post','',0),(3151,2,'2016-06-28 05:56:32','2016-06-28 12:56:32','','lin-manuel miranda reference','© Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/editorial-image-lin-manuel-miranda-wins-th-annual-tonys-multi-talented-holds-his-precious-statuette-winners-media-room-jcc-image72914600#res3619261\">Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo</a>','inherit','open','closed','','lin-manuel-miranda-reference','','','2016-07-07 15:04:47','2016-07-07 22:04:47','',3150,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3152,2,'2016-06-28 08:47:56','2016-06-28 15:47:56','VIDEO\r\n\r\nWell-known for his starring role in the hit Broadway musical <em>Hamilton</em>, Lin-Manuel Miranda has gotten a lot of buzz this year. Since it appears that Miranda has now left the <em>Hamilton</em> stage to pursue other opportunities, I thought it fitting to bid farewell with a speed drawing.\r\n\r\nI was originally planning to just do a quick sketch, but shortly into it I decided to\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3151\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"547\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\"><img class=\"size-full wp-image-3151\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\" alt=\"© Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo\" width=\"547\" height=\"800\" /></a> © Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/editorial-image-lin-manuel-miranda-wins-th-annual-tonys-multi-talented-holds-his-precious-statuette-winners-media-room-jcc-image72914600#res3619261\">Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo</a>[/caption]','Speed Drawing of Lin-Manuel Miranda','','inherit','closed','closed','','3150-revision-v1','','','2016-06-28 08:47:56','2016-06-28 15:47:56','',3150,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3150-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3226,2,'2016-07-30 09:19:27','2016-07-30 16:19:27','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\n\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3219\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"red value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\n\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3216\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"blue value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\n\n...and another value scale for green.\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3218\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"green value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\n\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3220\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\" alt=\"tints and shades\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\n\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\n\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\n\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a colored pencil drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\n\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3217\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\" alt=\"five value scale color sphere\" width=\"600\" height=\"554\" /></a>\n\nThe <strong>highlight</strong> on an object is the lightest value of the scale. It is of such a light value that it appears nearly or completely white. This is the spot where direct light is striking the object.\n\nThe next value on the scale which is slightly darker than the highlight is the <strong>reflected highlight</strong>. This tint consists of light bouncing back from surrounding surfaces. The reflected highlight is usually found along the edge of an object. It gives roundness to an object as it curves back toward darker, more shadowy areas.\n\nThe <strong>midtone</strong> is the true color of the object. Therefore, it has the middle value within the scale. This area of the object has neither light shining on it nor shadow cast upon it.\n\nThe first shade on the scale is called a <strong>core shadow</strong>. This simply indicates an area of shadow where the object is receding from the light source.\n\nThe final value of the scale is the <strong>cast shadow</strong>. This is where you will find the darkest values of the drawing, nearly black, since it represents that shadow that your object is casting onto a surface.\n\nOne thing you may notice about the object itself: there are no hard edges where one value stops and another value begins. Rather, there is a gradual transition from one value to the next. Remember this important detail when you are applying a value scale to your drawings!\n\nI happen to be an affiliate for a very comprehensive course on colored pencils. It will teach you in greater detail about applying value to your colored pencil drawings, and much more. You can <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/the-colored-pencil-course/\">click here to learn more</a> about it.','How to Identify and Apply Value in Your Artwork','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-autosave-v1','','','2016-07-30 09:19:27','2016-07-30 16:19:27','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3154,2,'2016-06-28 08:54:53','2016-06-28 15:54:53','','lin-manuel miranda','','inherit','open','closed','','lin-manuel-miranda','','','2016-06-28 08:54:53','2016-06-28 15:54:53','',3150,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3155,2,'2016-06-28 08:59:01','2016-06-28 15:59:01','<p style=\"text-align: center;\">VIDEO</p>\r\nWell-known for his starring role in the hit Broadway musical <em>Hamilton</em>, Lin-Manuel Miranda has gotten a lot of buzz this year. Since it appears that Miranda has now left the <em>Hamilton</em> stage to pursue other opportunities, I thought it fitting to bid farewell with a speed drawing.\r\n\r\nI was originally planning to just do a quick sketch, but shortly into it I decided to add a bit more detail and shading with a tortillion. This entire drawing was done with a regular graphite 2B pencil. I didn\'t spend as much time on this as I would have for a more realistic portrait drawing, but it still gives you a shortened version of the process.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3151\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"547\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\"><img class=\"size-full wp-image-3151\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\" alt=\"© Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo\" width=\"547\" height=\"800\" /></a> © Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/editorial-image-lin-manuel-miranda-wins-th-annual-tonys-multi-talented-holds-his-precious-statuette-winners-media-room-jcc-image72914600#res3619261\">Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo</a>[/caption]\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3154\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg\" alt=\"lin-manuel miranda\" width=\"575\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','Speed Drawing of Lin-Manuel Miranda','','inherit','closed','closed','','3150-revision-v1','','','2016-06-28 08:59:01','2016-06-28 15:59:01','',3150,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3150-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3156,2,'2016-06-28 13:15:48','2016-06-28 20:15:48','','1201151220 (3)','\"Sarah\" by Hoyle Wallace','inherit','open','closed','','1201151220-3','','','2016-07-07 15:04:47','2016-07-07 22:04:47','',662,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/07/1201151220-3.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3157,2,'2016-06-28 13:16:43','2016-06-28 20:16:43','','1020151422','Portrait by Hoyle Wallace','inherit','open','closed','','1020151422','','','2016-06-28 13:16:59','2016-06-28 20:16:59','',662,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/07/1020151422.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3158,2,'2016-06-28 13:19:25','2016-06-28 20:19:25','Welcome to our gallery of family drawings! Here you can view drawings of family members by our contributors and visitors.\r\n\r\nAs someone who is becoming more skilled at drawing people, you will find family and friends taking an increased interest in your talent. As a professional portrait artist, people who love your artwork will undoubtedly want to become your clients. When family, friends, or other people ask you (or pay you) to draw for them, who do they most often want you to draw?\r\n\r\nThey usually want you to draw a portrait from their personal collection of family photos. They may even ask you to take people from two or more photographs and combine them into one drawing. Your artistic creativity may sometimes be at play too, as when people ask you to include elements not in the original photographs.\r\n\r\nYou will see examples of all of these scenarios within this gallery. Notice the different arrangements of the subjects, features, and how the various elements of the family drawings create pleasing compositions. Happy viewing!\r\n\r\nIf you have <strong>your own</strong> family portrait drawing that you want others to view in this gallery, <a title=\"Share Your Work in a Portrait Gallery!\" href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/share-your-work/\">see how to share it with us</a>.\r\n\r\n[gallery link=\"file\" ids=\"649,644,761,762,763,666,1418,1422,1435,1654,1665,3028,3156,3157\" orderby=\"rand\"]','Family Drawings','','inherit','closed','closed','','662-revision-v1','','','2016-06-28 13:19:25','2016-06-28 20:19:25','',662,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/662-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3159,2,'2016-06-30 10:40:50','2016-06-30 17:40:50','OK kiddos, it’s time for another art lesson! Before I start, let me get some preliminaries out of the way. First off, I need to apologize for how the picture came out. This post is about drawing an eye in colored pencil, but you’re barely going to see any color. My scanner didn’t pick up the color that well. I hate that but I will do my best to explain and illustrate this lesson. I will still illustrate the pictures even though the color won’t show up well.\n<h2>Colored Pencil Brands</h2>\nI will be using an array of colored pencils from different brands. These will include Sargent’s colored pencil and Prismacolor, with the majority used by Sargent’s.\n\nI believe that’s why the color didn’t show up well – Sargent\'s doesn’t have wax in its pencils, so there will be no “shine’” to the finished product. The scanner usually picks up the shine but unfortunately not in this one.\n\nAnother colored pencil set that would be worth investing in besides Prismacolor is Col-Erase colored pencils and Prismacolor Verithin. These colored pencils have the same effect that a regular lead pencil has. What I mean by that is you can use my technique that I perform with a tissue. These pencils can be blended smoothly into the color next to them. Invest in them; you won’t be sorry.\n\nWith that being said, let’s hop on it!\n<h2>The Initial Outline</h2>\nWhether it’s an eye or a full sketch that will be in colored pencil, the first thing you will need to do is draw your subject out with a pencil, preferably a lighter pencil like between a 3H and 6H. You will need to make the pencil marks lighter later on as you get further into the drawing, so have a kneaded eraser handy or some Blu Tack to pick up the marks. That will also leave some faint marks to help guide you as you progress in your art picture.\n\nHere I drew an eye that started as a football/almond-shaped object, and I added a circle in the middle to represent the iris. Keep in mind that I’m doing this from the top of my head – I’m not using a picture or model of an eye.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2926 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n\nI then filled in the pupil using a Sargent’s black colored pencil and drew an ellipse in the pupil and iris area to illustrate a glare/highlight in the eye. I’ve also traced a darker circle around the edge of the iris.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2927 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0002.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n<h2>Work on the Iris</h2>\nOK, so here is where the problem starts. Note to self: do not use Sargent’s pencils for the main color. They will not show well in the scanner. As you can tell, I supposedly filled in the iris with Sargent’s brown colored pencil and some of Prismacolor’s peach beige. Let it be known that this is the same pencil I use for Caucasian skin tone.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2928 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0003.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n\nAdding some detail, I added the eyelid crease with Sargent’s black and used the Sargent’s brown pencil to add more detail of some of the darker part of the iris flooding into the lighter part near the pupil.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2929 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0004.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"774\" height=\"413\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n<h2>The Surrounding Eye</h2>\nIn this stage, I added some shading toward the upper part of the eye using Prismacolor\'s 50% cool grey, and I used Sargent’s black to draw in the eyelashes.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2930 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0005.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"835\" height=\"413\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n\nIn the final stage, I added some Prismacolor blush pink and a little bit of pale vermillion to the tear duct area. I then colored around the eye area with Prismacolor peach beige; unfortunately, my scanner had different plans.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2931 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0006.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"835\" height=\"512\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n<h2>Smoothing Out the Work</h2>\nAn extra thing I like to add to my art piece, especially if I’m working with colored pencil, chalk, or crayon, is load the picture onto my computer and I will load it to my PaintShop Pro so that I can smooth out the pencil scribbles. To each his own; some people like it and some don’t, but it always makes an improvement on the picture, especially on my crayon art.\n\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2932 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007\" width=\"835\" height=\"512\" />\n\n&nbsp;\n<h2>Personal Takeaway</h2>\nOK, so this was a quick colored pencil lesson. I don’t know if it was helpful since my scanner went rebel on me. Then again, using the Sargent colored pencils was a no-no. I know now to use all colored pencils except them.\n\nIf anything, this is how the picture looked using a camera (there’s more than one way to skin a cat):\n\n[caption id=\"attachment_2933\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"391\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2933 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0211.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0211\" width=\"391\" height=\"200\" /> Before computer smoothing[/caption]\n\n&nbsp;\n\n[caption id=\"attachment_2934\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"391\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2934 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0212.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0212\" width=\"391\" height=\"200\" /> After computer smoothing[/caption]\n\n&nbsp;\n\nThis is just one approach to drawing an eye with colored pencils. If you want to see more colored pencil techniques and the result of layering multiple colors using <em><strong>only</strong></em> Prismacolor, you can download the step-by-step lesson in the box below.','How to Draw an Eye with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','2925-autosave-v1','','','2016-06-30 10:40:50','2016-06-30 17:40:50','',2925,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2925-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3161,2,'2016-06-29 11:16:20','2016-06-29 18:16:20','<center><iframe src=\"https://www.youtube.com/embed/dzXZBIyYRbE?rel=0\" width=\"640\" height=\"360\" frameborder=\"0\" allowfullscreen=\"allowfullscreen\"></iframe></center>Well-known for his starring role in the hit Broadway musical <em>Hamilton</em>, Lin-Manuel Miranda has gotten a lot of buzz this year. Since it appears that Miranda has now left the <em>Hamilton</em> stage to pursue other opportunities, I thought it fitting to bid farewell with a speed drawing.\r\n\r\nI was originally planning to just do a quick sketch, but shortly into it I decided to add a bit more detail and shading with a tortillion. This entire drawing was done with a regular graphite 2B pencil. I didn\'t spend as much time on this as I would have for a more realistic portrait drawing, but it still gives you a shortened version of the process.\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3151\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"547\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\"><img class=\"size-full wp-image-3151\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda-reference.jpg\" alt=\"© Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo\" width=\"547\" height=\"800\" /></a> © Lagron49 | Dreamstime.com - <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/editorial-image-lin-manuel-miranda-wins-th-annual-tonys-multi-talented-holds-his-precious-statuette-winners-media-room-jcc-image72914600#res3619261\">Lin-Manuel Miranda Wins At 70th Annual Tonys Photo</a>[/caption]\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3154\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/06/lin-manuel-miranda.jpg\" alt=\"lin-manuel miranda\" width=\"575\" height=\"800\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','Speed Drawing of Lin-Manuel Miranda','','inherit','closed','closed','','3150-revision-v1','','','2016-06-29 11:16:20','2016-06-29 18:16:20','',3150,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3150-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3163,2,'2016-06-30 04:47:23','2016-06-30 11:47:23','OK kiddos, it’s time for another art lesson! Before I start, let me get some preliminaries out of the way. First off, I need to apologize for how the picture came out. This post is about drawing an eye in colored pencil, but you’re barely going to see any color. My scanner didn’t pick up the color that well. I hate that but I will do my best to explain and illustrate this lesson. I will still illustrate the pictures even though the color won’t show up well. ***<span style=\"text-decoration: underline;\"><strong><em>there will be other color pencil lessons and I will make the colors deeper.***</em></strong></span>\r\n\r\nAlso, I will be using an array of colored pencils from different brands. These will include Sargent’s colored pencil and Prismacolor, with the majority used by Sargent’s. I believe that’s why the color didn’t show up well – Sargent\'s doesn’t have wax in its pencils, so there will be no “shine’” to the finished product. The scanner usually picks up the shine but unfortunately not in this one. Another colored pencil set that would be worth investing in besides Prismacolor is Col-Erase colored pencils and Prismacolor Verithin. These colored pencils have the same effect that a regular lead pencil has. What I mean by that is you can use my technique that I perform with a tissue. These pencils can be blended smoothly into the color next to them. Invest in them; you won’t be sorry. With that being said, let’s hop on it!*****\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2926 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001-300x147.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001\" width=\"300\" height=\"147\" />\r\n\r\nThe first thing you do, whether it’s an eye or a full sketch that will be in color pencil, is you will need to draw it out with a pencil, preferably a lighter pencil like between a 3H and 6H. You will need to make the pencil marks lighter later on as you get further into the drawing so have a kneaded erasure handy or some Blu Tack to pick up the marks that will also leave some faint marks to help guide you as you progress in your art picture. Here I drew an eye that started like a football/almond shape object and added a semi-circle in the middle to represent the iris. Keep in mind I’m doing this from the top of my head – I’m not using a picture or model of an eye; this is strictly free base.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2927 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0002-300x147.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"300\" height=\"147\" />\r\n\r\nI then fill in the pupil using a Sargent’s black color pencil and drew in an ellipse circle in the pupil and iris area to illustrate a glare/highlight in the eye. I’ve also trace a darker circle around the edge of the iris.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2928 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0003-300x147.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"300\" height=\"147\" />\r\n\r\nOK so here is where the problem starts. Note to self, do not use Sargent’s pencils for main color, they will not show well in the scanner. As you can tell, I supposedly fill in the iris with Sargent’s brown color pencil and some of Prismacolor’s peach beige. Let it be known that this is the same pencil I use for Caucasian skin tone.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2929 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0004-300x160.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"300\" height=\"160\" />\r\n\r\nAdding some detail, I added the eyelid crease with Sargent’s black and use the Sargent’s brown pencil to add more detail of some of the darker part of the iris flooding into the lighter part near the pupil.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2930 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0005-300x148.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"300\" height=\"148\" />\r\n\r\nIn this stage, I add some shading toward the upper part of the eye using Prismacolor’s 50% cool grey and I used Sargent’s black to draw in the eyelashes.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2931 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0006-300x184.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"300\" height=\"184\" />\r\n\r\nIn the final stage, I added some Prismacolor blush pink and a little bit of pale vermillion to the tear duct area. I then color around the eye area with Prismacolor peach beige; unfortunately my scanner had different plans.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2932 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007-300x184.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007\" width=\"300\" height=\"184\" />\r\n\r\nAn extra thing I like to add to my art piece, especially if I’m working with color pencil, chalk, or crayon is I will load the picture onto my computer and I will load it to my PaintShop Pro so that I can smooth out the pencil scribbles. To each his own; some people like it and some don’t but it always makes an improvement on the picture, especially on my crayon art.\r\n\r\nOk so this was a quick color pencil lesson. I don’t know if it was helpful since my scanner went rebel on me. Then again, using the Sargent color pencils were a no-no. I know now to use all color pencils except them. If anything, this is how the picture looked using a camera (there’s more than one way to skin a cat):\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2933\" align=\"alignleft\" width=\"300\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2933 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0211-300x153.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0211\" width=\"300\" height=\"153\" /> Before computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2934\" align=\"alignright\" width=\"300\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2934 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0212-300x153.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0212\" width=\"300\" height=\"153\" /> After computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\nSee you guys in the next lesson!','How to Draw an Eye with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','2925-revision-v1','','','2016-06-30 04:47:23','2016-06-30 11:47:23','',2925,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2925-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3165,2,'2016-06-30 09:47:08','2016-06-30 16:47:08','OK kiddos, it’s time for another art lesson! Before I start, let me get some preliminaries out of the way. First off, I need to apologize for how the picture came out. This post is about drawing an eye in colored pencil, but you’re barely going to see any color. My scanner didn’t pick up the color that well. I hate that but I will do my best to explain and illustrate this lesson. I will still illustrate the pictures even though the color won’t show up well.\r\n\r\nAlso, I will be using an array of colored pencils from different brands. These will include Sargent’s colored pencil and Prismacolor, with the majority used by Sargent’s. I believe that’s why the color didn’t show up well – Sargent\'s doesn’t have wax in its pencils, so there will be no “shine’” to the finished product. The scanner usually picks up the shine but unfortunately not in this one. Another colored pencil set that would be worth investing in besides Prismacolor is Col-Erase colored pencils and Prismacolor Verithin. These colored pencils have the same effect that a regular lead pencil has. What I mean by that is you can use my technique that I perform with a tissue. These pencils can be blended smoothly into the color next to them. Invest in them; you won’t be sorry. With that being said, let’s hop on it!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2926 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001-300x147.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001\" width=\"300\" height=\"147\" />\r\n\r\nWhether it’s an eye or a full sketch that will be in colored pencil, the first thing you will need to do is draw your subject out with a pencil, preferably a lighter pencil like between a 3H and 6H. You will need to make the pencil marks lighter later on as you get further into the drawing, so have a kneaded eraser handy or some Blu Tack to pick up the marks. That will also leave some faint marks to help guide you as you progress in your art picture. Here I drew an eye that started as a football/almond-shaped object, and I added a circle in the middle to represent the iris. Keep in mind that I’m doing this from the top of my head – I’m not using a picture or model of an eye.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2927 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0002-300x147.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"300\" height=\"147\" />\r\n\r\nI then filled in the pupil using a Sargent’s black colored pencil and drew an ellipse in the pupil and iris area to illustrate a glare/highlight in the eye. I’ve also traced a darker circle around the edge of the iris.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2928 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0003-300x147.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"300\" height=\"147\" />\r\n\r\nOK, so here is where the problem starts. Note to self: do not use Sargent’s pencils for the main color. They will not show well in the scanner. As you can tell, I supposedly filled in the iris with Sargent’s brown colored pencil and some of Prismacolor’s peach beige. Let it be known that this is the same pencil I use for Caucasian skin tone.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2929 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0004-300x160.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"300\" height=\"160\" />\r\n\r\nAdding some detail, I added the eyelid crease with Sargent’s black and used the Sargent’s brown pencil to add more detail of some of the darker part of the iris flooding into the lighter part near the pupil.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2930 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0005-300x148.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"300\" height=\"148\" />\r\n\r\nIn this stage, I added some shading toward the upper part of the eye using Prismacolor\'s 50% cool grey, and I used Sargent’s black to draw in the eyelashes.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2931 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0006-300x184.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"300\" height=\"184\" />\r\n\r\nIn the final stage, I added some Prismacolor blush pink and a little bit of pale vermillion to the tear duct area. I then colored around the eye area with Prismacolor peach beige; unfortunately, my scanner had different plans.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<img class=\"size-medium wp-image-2932 aligncenter\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007-300x184.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007\" width=\"300\" height=\"184\" />\r\n\r\nAn extra thing I like to add to my art piece, especially if I’m working with colored pencil, chalk, or crayon, is load the picture onto my computer and I will load it to my PaintShop Pro so that I can smooth out the pencil scribbles. To each his own; some people like it and some don’t, but it always makes an improvement on the picture, especially on my crayon art.\r\n\r\nOk so this was a quick colored pencil lesson. I don’t know if it was helpful since my scanner went rebel on me. Then again, using the Sargent colored pencils was a no-no. I know now to use all color pencils except them. If anything, this is how the picture looked using a camera (there’s more than one way to skin a cat):\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2933\" align=\"alignleft\" width=\"300\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2933 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0211-300x153.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0211\" width=\"300\" height=\"153\" /> Before computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2934\" align=\"alignright\" width=\"300\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2934 size-medium\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0212-300x153.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0212\" width=\"300\" height=\"153\" /> After computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThis is just one approach to drawing an eye with colored pencils. If you want to see a different approach and the result of layering multiple colors and using <em><strong>only</strong></em> Prismacolor, you can download a step-by-step lesson in the box below.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Draw an Eye with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','2925-revision-v1','','','2016-06-30 09:47:08','2016-06-30 16:47:08','',2925,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2925-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3175,2,'2016-07-13 05:32:44','2016-07-13 12:32:44','OK kiddos, it’s time for another art lesson! Before I start, let me get some preliminaries out of the way. First off, I need to apologize for how the picture came out. This post is about drawing an eye in colored pencil, but you’re barely going to see any color. My scanner didn’t pick up the color that well. I hate that but I will do my best to explain and illustrate this lesson. I will still illustrate the pictures even though the color won’t show up well.\r\n<h2>Colored Pencil Brands</h2>\r\nI will be using an array of colored pencils from different brands. These will include Sargent’s colored pencil and Prismacolor, with the majority used by Sargent’s.\r\n\r\nI believe that’s why the color didn’t show up well – Sargent\'s doesn’t have wax in its pencils, so there will be no “shine’” to the finished product. The scanner usually picks up the shine but unfortunately not in this one.\r\n\r\nAnother colored pencil set that would be worth investing in besides Prismacolor is Col-Erase colored pencils and Prismacolor Verithin. These colored pencils have the same effect that a regular lead pencil has. What I mean by that is you can use my technique that I perform with a tissue. These pencils can be blended smoothly into the color next to them. Invest in them; you won’t be sorry.\r\n\r\nWith that being said, let’s hop on it!\r\n<h2>The Initial Outline</h2>\r\nWhether it’s an eye or a full sketch that will be in colored pencil, the first thing you will need to do is draw your subject out with a pencil, preferably a lighter pencil like between a 3H and 6H. You will need to make the pencil marks lighter later on as you get further into the drawing, so have a kneaded eraser handy or some Blu Tack to pick up the marks. That will also leave some faint marks to help guide you as you progress in your art picture.\r\n\r\nHere I drew an eye that started as a football/almond-shaped object, and I added a circle in the middle to represent the iris. Keep in mind that I’m doing this from the top of my head – I’m not using a picture or model of an eye.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2926 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then filled in the pupil using a Sargent’s black colored pencil and drew an ellipse in the pupil and iris area to illustrate a glare/highlight in the eye. I’ve also traced a darker circle around the edge of the iris.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2927 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0002.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Iris</h2>\r\nOK, so here is where the problem starts. Note to self: do not use Sargent’s pencils for the main color. They will not show well in the scanner. As you can tell, I supposedly filled in the iris with Sargent’s brown colored pencil and some of Prismacolor’s peach beige. Let it be known that this is the same pencil I use for Caucasian skin tone.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2928 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0003.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdding some detail, I added the eyelid crease with Sargent’s black and used the Sargent’s brown pencil to add more detail of some of the darker part of the iris flooding into the lighter part near the pupil.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2929 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0004.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"774\" height=\"413\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>The Surrounding Eye</h2>\r\nIn this stage, I added some shading toward the upper part of the eye using Prismacolor\'s 50% cool grey, and I used Sargent’s black to draw in the eyelashes.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2930 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0005.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"835\" height=\"413\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the final stage, I added some Prismacolor blush pink and a little bit of pale vermillion to the tear duct area. I then colored around the eye area with Prismacolor peach beige; unfortunately, my scanner had different plans.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2931 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0006.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"835\" height=\"512\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Smoothing Out the Work</h2>\r\nAn extra thing I like to add to my art piece, especially if I’m working with colored pencil, chalk, or crayon, is load the picture onto my computer and I will load it to my PaintShop Pro so that I can smooth out the pencil scribbles. To each his own; some people like it and some don’t, but it always makes an improvement on the picture, especially on my crayon art.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2932 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007\" width=\"835\" height=\"512\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Personal Takeaway</h2>\r\nOK, so this was a quick colored pencil lesson. I don’t know if it was helpful since my scanner went rebel on me. Then again, using the Sargent colored pencils was a no-no. I know now to use all colored pencils except them.\r\n\r\nIf anything, this is how the picture looked using a camera (there’s more than one way to skin a cat):\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2933\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"391\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2933 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0211.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0211\" width=\"391\" height=\"200\" /> Before computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2934\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"391\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2934 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0212.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0212\" width=\"391\" height=\"200\" /> After computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThis is just one approach to drawing an eye with colored pencils. If you want to see more colored pencil techniques and the result of layering multiple colors using <em><strong>only</strong></em> Prismacolor, you can download the step-by-step lesson in the box below.','Draw an Eye with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','2925-revision-v1','','','2016-07-13 05:32:44','2016-07-13 12:32:44','',2925,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2925-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3166,2,'2016-06-30 10:41:19','2016-06-30 17:41:19','OK kiddos, it’s time for another art lesson! Before I start, let me get some preliminaries out of the way. First off, I need to apologize for how the picture came out. This post is about drawing an eye in colored pencil, but you’re barely going to see any color. My scanner didn’t pick up the color that well. I hate that but I will do my best to explain and illustrate this lesson. I will still illustrate the pictures even though the color won’t show up well.\r\n<h2>Colored Pencil Brands</h2>\r\nI will be using an array of colored pencils from different brands. These will include Sargent’s colored pencil and Prismacolor, with the majority used by Sargent’s.\r\n\r\nI believe that’s why the color didn’t show up well – Sargent\'s doesn’t have wax in its pencils, so there will be no “shine’” to the finished product. The scanner usually picks up the shine but unfortunately not in this one.\r\n\r\nAnother colored pencil set that would be worth investing in besides Prismacolor is Col-Erase colored pencils and Prismacolor Verithin. These colored pencils have the same effect that a regular lead pencil has. What I mean by that is you can use my technique that I perform with a tissue. These pencils can be blended smoothly into the color next to them. Invest in them; you won’t be sorry.\r\n\r\nWith that being said, let’s hop on it!\r\n<h2>The Initial Outline</h2>\r\nWhether it’s an eye or a full sketch that will be in colored pencil, the first thing you will need to do is draw your subject out with a pencil, preferably a lighter pencil like between a 3H and 6H. You will need to make the pencil marks lighter later on as you get further into the drawing, so have a kneaded eraser handy or some Blu Tack to pick up the marks. That will also leave some faint marks to help guide you as you progress in your art picture.\r\n\r\nHere I drew an eye that started as a football/almond-shaped object, and I added a circle in the middle to represent the iris. Keep in mind that I’m doing this from the top of my head – I’m not using a picture or model of an eye.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2926 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0001.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0001\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nI then filled in the pupil using a Sargent’s black colored pencil and drew an ellipse in the pupil and iris area to illustrate a glare/highlight in the eye. I’ve also traced a darker circle around the edge of the iris.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2927 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0002.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0002\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Iris</h2>\r\nOK, so here is where the problem starts. Note to self: do not use Sargent’s pencils for the main color. They will not show well in the scanner. As you can tell, I supposedly filled in the iris with Sargent’s brown colored pencil and some of Prismacolor’s peach beige. Let it be known that this is the same pencil I use for Caucasian skin tone.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2928 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0003.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0003\" width=\"774\" height=\"379\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdding some detail, I added the eyelid crease with Sargent’s black and used the Sargent’s brown pencil to add more detail of some of the darker part of the iris flooding into the lighter part near the pupil.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2929 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0004.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0004\" width=\"774\" height=\"413\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>The Surrounding Eye</h2>\r\nIn this stage, I added some shading toward the upper part of the eye using Prismacolor\'s 50% cool grey, and I used Sargent’s black to draw in the eyelashes.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2930 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0005.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0005\" width=\"835\" height=\"413\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the final stage, I added some Prismacolor blush pink and a little bit of pale vermillion to the tear duct area. I then colored around the eye area with Prismacolor peach beige; unfortunately, my scanner had different plans.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2931 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0006.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0006\" width=\"835\" height=\"512\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Smoothing Out the Work</h2>\r\nAn extra thing I like to add to my art piece, especially if I’m working with colored pencil, chalk, or crayon, is load the picture onto my computer and I will load it to my PaintShop Pro so that I can smooth out the pencil scribbles. To each his own; some people like it and some don’t, but it always makes an improvement on the picture, especially on my crayon art.\r\n\r\n<img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-2932 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/Scan0007.jpg\" alt=\"Scan0007\" width=\"835\" height=\"512\" />\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Personal Takeaway</h2>\r\nOK, so this was a quick colored pencil lesson. I don’t know if it was helpful since my scanner went rebel on me. Then again, using the Sargent colored pencils was a no-no. I know now to use all colored pencils except them.\r\n\r\nIf anything, this is how the picture looked using a camera (there’s more than one way to skin a cat):\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2933\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"391\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2933 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0211.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0211\" width=\"391\" height=\"200\" /> Before computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_2934\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"391\"]<img class=\"wp-image-2934 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/02/IMG_0212.jpg\" alt=\"IMG_0212\" width=\"391\" height=\"200\" /> After computer smoothing[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nThis is just one approach to drawing an eye with colored pencils. If you want to see more colored pencil techniques and the result of layering multiple colors using <em><strong>only</strong></em> Prismacolor, you can download the step-by-step lesson in the box below.','How to Draw an Eye with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','2925-revision-v1','','','2016-06-30 10:41:19','2016-06-30 17:41:19','',2925,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/2925-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3184,2,'2016-07-15 12:03:27','2016-07-15 19:03:27','','colorless blender','','inherit','open','closed','','colorless-blender','','','2016-07-15 12:03:27','2016-07-15 19:03:27','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/colorless-blender.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3168,2,'2016-07-07 13:11:18','2016-07-07 20:11:18','','/how-to-draw-an-eye-with-colored-pencils-thank-you','','publish','closed','closed','','3168','','','2016-07-07 13:11:18','2016-07-07 20:11:18','',0,'',0,'leadpages_post','',0),(3169,2,'2016-07-07 13:11:55','2016-07-07 20:11:55','','/how-to-draw-an-eye-with-colored-pencils','','publish','closed','closed','','3169','','','2016-07-07 13:11:55','2016-07-07 20:11:55','',0,'',0,'leadpages_post','',0),(3170,2,'2015-07-07 23:24:34','2015-07-08 06:24:34','','lm eye with colored pencils','','publish','closed','closed','','lm-face-drawing-checklist-2','','','2016-07-07 15:12:59','2016-07-07 22:12:59','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?post_type=action-box&#038;p=2032',0,'action-box','',0),(3171,2,'2016-07-07 14:27:29','2016-07-07 21:27:29','','lm eye with colored pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3170-autosave-v1','','','2016-07-07 14:27:29','2016-07-07 21:27:29','',3170,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3170-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3172,2,'2016-07-07 15:04:02','2016-07-07 22:04:02','','how to draw an eye with colored pencils','','inherit','open','closed','','how-to-draw-an-eye-with-colored-pencils-2','','','2016-07-07 15:04:02','2016-07-07 22:04:02','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/how-to-draw-an-eye-with-colored-pencils.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3174,2,'2016-07-10 08:03:17','2016-07-10 15:03:17','','eye with colored pencils webform 420x122','','inherit','open','closed','','eye-with-colored-pencils-webform-420x122','','','2016-07-10 08:03:17','2016-07-10 15:03:17','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/eye-with-colored-pencils-webform-420x122.png',0,'attachment','image/png',0),(3176,2,'2016-07-13 10:06:06','2016-07-13 17:06:06','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about \"painting\" with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\nBurnishing is a special process that allows you to create colored pencil drawings that resemble paintings. When you burnish, you are actually layering colored pencils in order to make a solid area of pigment. The burnishing process takes away the texture made by the drawing surface and leaves a result that looks similar to a painting.\r\n<h2>How to Burnish</h2>\r\nThere are several different ways you can burnish your colored pencil drawings. For now, I am going to share two of those ways. Don\'t worry...they are both effective and easy to implement!\r\n\r\nFor these examples, I used Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils. However, you can use these techniques with other brands as well.\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The first technique</strong></em> involves identifying the area you want to burnish and layering it with a white colored pencil. As you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only the original color (Prismacolor True Blue - PC903) and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with White (PC938). You should use heavy pressure with your White pencil when burnishing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3187\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white.jpg\" alt=\"true blue white\" width=\"521\" height=\"297\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The second technique</strong></em> involves doing the same thing as the first; only instead of using white to burnish, you will use what is called a Colorless blender (PC1077). A colorless blender is a special kind of pencil that has a binder inside of it (just like all colored pencils) but lacks the pigment that the binder is meant to hold together. You can find them sold individually or as part of a colored pencil accessory set. Here is what a colorless blender looks like:\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/colorless-blender.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3184\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/colorless-blender.jpg\" alt=\"colorless blender\" width=\"800\" height=\"212\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAs you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only True Blue and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with the colorless blender. Again, you should use heavy pressure.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-colorless-blender.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3185\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-colorless-blender.jpg\" alt=\"true blue colorless blender\" width=\"468\" height=\"344\" /></a>\r\n<h3>Which Technique Is Best?</h3>\r\nYou might notice that with both techniques, the True Blue experiences a change in value after being burnished.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white-and-colorless-blender.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3186\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white-and-colorless-blender.jpg\" alt=\"true blue white and colorless blender\" width=\"452\" height=\"648\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou might also notice that the white has a much greater effect on the change in value while the colorless blender\'s effect on value change is not as noticeable. You will have to decide what kind of effect you are going for, and that will help you decide on which technique to use.\r\n<h2>Drawing, Coloring, and Painting</h2>\r\nNot only is burnishing similar to painting, but it is also similar to the blending process of graphite pencils. Just like smoothing and blending out the graphite helps our black and white pencil art look more realistic, the burnishing process smooths and blends out the colors in our colored pencil art.\r\n\r\nNow you can see that with the help of burnishing, art drawn in colored pencils can appear even more like paintings. So the next time you \"draw\" in colored pencil, remember to try out one or both of these burnishing techniques and \"paint\" in colored pencil instead!','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','publish','open','open','','how-to-paint-with-colored-pencils','','','2016-07-23 05:16:21','2016-07-23 12:16:21','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3176',0,'post','',0),(3177,2,'2016-07-13 10:03:34','2016-07-13 17:03:34','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about painting with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-13 10:03:34','2016-07-13 17:03:34','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3178,2,'2016-07-13 10:06:21','2016-07-13 17:06:21','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about painting with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-13 10:06:21','2016-07-13 17:06:21','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3180,2,'2016-07-13 10:37:41','2016-07-13 17:37:41','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about \"painting\" with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\nBurnishing is a special process that allows you to create colored pencil drawings that resemble paintings. When you burnish, you are actually layering colored pencils in order to make a solid area of pigment. The burnishing process takes away the texture made by the drawing surface and leaves a result that looks similar to a painting.\r\n<h2>How to Burnish</h2>\r\nThere are several different ways you can burnish your colored pencil drawings. For now, I am going to share two of those ways. Don\'t worry...they are both effective and easy to implement!\r\n\r\nThe first technique involves identifying the area you want to burnish and layering it with a white colored pencil.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\nsecond technique colorless blender; where to find\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\ncompare white and colorless','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-13 10:37:41','2016-07-13 17:37:41','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3181,2,'2016-07-14 11:58:25','2016-07-14 18:58:25','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about \"painting\" with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\nBurnishing is a special process that allows you to create colored pencil drawings that resemble paintings. When you burnish, you are actually layering colored pencils in order to make a solid area of pigment. The burnishing process takes away the texture made by the drawing surface and leaves a result that looks similar to a painting.\r\n<h2>How to Burnish</h2>\r\nThere are several different ways you can burnish your colored pencil drawings. For now, I am going to share two of those ways. Don\'t worry...they are both effective and easy to implement!\r\n\r\nFor these examples, I used Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils. However, you can use these techniques with other brands as well.\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The first technique</strong></em> involves identifying the area you want to burnish and layering it with a white colored pencil. As you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only the original color (Prismacolor True Blue - PC903) and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with White (PC938). You should use heavy pressure with your White pencil when burnishing.\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The second technique</strong></em> involves doing the same thing as the first; only instead of using white to burnish, you will use what is called a Colorless blender (PC1077). A colorless blender is a special kind of pencil that has a binder inside of it (just like all colored pencils) but lacks the pigment that the binder is meant to hold together. You can find them sold individually or as part of a colored pencil accessory set. Here is what a colorless blender looks like:\r\n\r\npic\r\n\r\nAs you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only True Blue and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with the colorless blender. Again, you should use heavy pressure.\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou might notice that with both techniques, the True Blue experiences a change in value after being burnished.\r\n\r\ncomparison pic\r\n\r\nYou might also notice that the white has a much greater effect on the change in value while the colorless blender\'s effect on value change is not as noticeable. You will have to decide what kind of effect you are going for, and that will help you decide on which technique to use.\r\n\r\nNot only is burnishing similar to painting, but it is also similar to the blending process of graphite pencils. Just like smoothing and blending out the graphite helps our black and white pencil art look more realistic, the burnishing process smooths and blends out the colors in our colored pencil art.\r\n\r\nNow you see that with the added effect of pigment, this blending of colors helps art drawn in colored pencils to appear even more like painting.','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-14 11:58:25','2016-07-14 18:58:25','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3182,2,'2016-07-14 12:13:21','2016-07-14 19:13:21','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about \"painting\" with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\nBurnishing is a special process that allows you to create colored pencil drawings that resemble paintings. When you burnish, you are actually layering colored pencils in order to make a solid area of pigment. The burnishing process takes away the texture made by the drawing surface and leaves a result that looks similar to a painting.\r\n<h2>How to Burnish</h2>\r\nThere are several different ways you can burnish your colored pencil drawings. For now, I am going to share two of those ways. Don\'t worry...they are both effective and easy to implement!\r\n\r\nFor these examples, I used Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils. However, you can use these techniques with other brands as well.\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The first technique</strong></em> involves identifying the area you want to burnish and layering it with a white colored pencil. As you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only the original color (Prismacolor True Blue - PC903) and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with White (PC938). You should use heavy pressure with your White pencil when burnishing.\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The second technique</strong></em> involves doing the same thing as the first; only instead of using white to burnish, you will use what is called a Colorless blender (PC1077). A colorless blender is a special kind of pencil that has a binder inside of it (just like all colored pencils) but lacks the pigment that the binder is meant to hold together. You can find them sold individually or as part of a colored pencil accessory set. Here is what a colorless blender looks like:\r\n\r\npic\r\n\r\nAs you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only True Blue and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with the colorless blender. Again, you should use heavy pressure.\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nYou might notice that with both techniques, the True Blue experiences a change in value after being burnished.\r\n\r\ncomparison pic\r\n\r\nYou might also notice that the white has a much greater effect on the change in value while the colorless blender\'s effect on value change is not as noticeable. You will have to decide what kind of effect you are going for, and that will help you decide on which technique to use.\r\n\r\nNot only is burnishing similar to painting, but it is also similar to the blending process of graphite pencils. Just like smoothing and blending out the graphite helps our black and white pencil art look more realistic, the burnishing process smooths and blends out the colors in our colored pencil art.\r\n\r\nNow you can see that with the help of burnishing, art drawn in colored pencils can appear even more like paintings. So the next time you \"draw\" in colored pencil, remember to try out one or both of these burnishing techniques and \"paint\" in colored pencil instead!','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-14 12:13:21','2016-07-14 19:13:21','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3183,2,'2016-07-14 12:36:23','2016-07-14 19:36:23','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about \"painting\" with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\nBurnishing is a special process that allows you to create colored pencil drawings that resemble paintings. When you burnish, you are actually layering colored pencils in order to make a solid area of pigment. The burnishing process takes away the texture made by the drawing surface and leaves a result that looks similar to a painting.\r\n<h2>How to Burnish</h2>\r\nThere are several different ways you can burnish your colored pencil drawings. For now, I am going to share two of those ways. Don\'t worry...they are both effective and easy to implement!\r\n\r\nFor these examples, I used Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils. However, you can use these techniques with other brands as well.\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The first technique</strong></em> involves identifying the area you want to burnish and layering it with a white colored pencil. As you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only the original color (Prismacolor True Blue - PC903) and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with White (PC938). You should use heavy pressure with your White pencil when burnishing.\r\n\r\npic example\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The second technique</strong></em> involves doing the same thing as the first; only instead of using white to burnish, you will use what is called a Colorless blender (PC1077). A colorless blender is a special kind of pencil that has a binder inside of it (just like all colored pencils) but lacks the pigment that the binder is meant to hold together. You can find them sold individually or as part of a colored pencil accessory set. Here is what a colorless blender looks like:\r\n\r\npic\r\n\r\nAs you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only True Blue and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with the colorless blender. Again, you should use heavy pressure.\r\n\r\npic example\r\n<h3>Which Technique Is Best?</h3>\r\nYou might notice that with both techniques, the True Blue experiences a change in value after being burnished.\r\n\r\ncomparison pic\r\n\r\nYou might also notice that the white has a much greater effect on the change in value while the colorless blender\'s effect on value change is not as noticeable. You will have to decide what kind of effect you are going for, and that will help you decide on which technique to use.\r\n<h2>Drawing, Coloring, and Painting</h2>\r\nNot only is burnishing similar to painting, but it is also similar to the blending process of graphite pencils. Just like smoothing and blending out the graphite helps our black and white pencil art look more realistic, the burnishing process smooths and blends out the colors in our colored pencil art.\r\n\r\nNow you can see that with the help of burnishing, art drawn in colored pencils can appear even more like paintings. So the next time you \"draw\" in colored pencil, remember to try out one or both of these burnishing techniques and \"paint\" in colored pencil instead!','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-14 12:36:23','2016-07-14 19:36:23','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3185,2,'2016-07-15 12:03:29','2016-07-15 19:03:29','','true blue colorless blender','','inherit','open','closed','','true-blue-colorless-blender','','','2016-07-15 12:03:29','2016-07-15 19:03:29','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-colorless-blender.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3186,2,'2016-07-15 12:03:32','2016-07-15 19:03:32','','true blue white and colorless blender','','inherit','open','closed','','true-blue-white-and-colorless-blender','','','2016-07-15 12:03:32','2016-07-15 19:03:32','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white-and-colorless-blender.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3187,2,'2016-07-15 12:03:34','2016-07-15 19:03:34','','true blue white','','inherit','open','closed','','true-blue-white','','','2016-07-15 12:03:34','2016-07-15 19:03:34','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3188,2,'2016-07-15 12:06:35','2016-07-15 19:06:35','If you want to make a transition from drawing realistically with graphite pencils to drawing realistically with colored pencils, then it is natural to want to maintain the \"realistic\" aspect of your work.\r\n\r\nThat said, it can be a challenge to make drawings look real with colored pencils.\r\n\r\nYes, it is true that they add color to your work. However, colored pencils, as versatile as they can be, are still a far cry from being able to mimic an exact representation of the vast array of colors portrayed in real life or in a photograph.\r\n\r\nEven so, there is a lot you can do with colored pencils to get a look that is at least closer to a \"realistic\" look. For example, have you ever thought about \"painting\" with colored pencils?\r\n<h2>Burnishing...the Art of Painting with Pencils</h2>\r\nYou may be thinking, \"It\'s impossible to paint using colored pencils!\"\r\n\r\nThe reason I bring up painting is because out of all the art mediums, paint is the one most closely associated with the most realistic works of art.\r\n\r\nNow since the focus of this lesson is on the medium of colored pencils, wouldn\'t it be cool if we could achieve an effect similar to painting with our colored pencils?\r\n\r\nIt is quite possible to achieve such an effect using the technique of burnishing.\r\n\r\nBurnishing is a special process that allows you to create colored pencil drawings that resemble paintings. When you burnish, you are actually layering colored pencils in order to make a solid area of pigment. The burnishing process takes away the texture made by the drawing surface and leaves a result that looks similar to a painting.\r\n<h2>How to Burnish</h2>\r\nThere are several different ways you can burnish your colored pencil drawings. For now, I am going to share two of those ways. Don\'t worry...they are both effective and easy to implement!\r\n\r\nFor these examples, I used Prismacolor Premier Colored Pencils. However, you can use these techniques with other brands as well.\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The first technique</strong></em> involves identifying the area you want to burnish and layering it with a white colored pencil. As you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only the original color (Prismacolor True Blue - PC903) and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with White (PC938). You should use heavy pressure with your White pencil when burnishing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3187\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white.jpg\" alt=\"true blue white\" width=\"521\" height=\"297\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<em><strong>The second technique</strong></em> involves doing the same thing as the first; only instead of using white to burnish, you will use what is called a Colorless blender (PC1077). A colorless blender is a special kind of pencil that has a binder inside of it (just like all colored pencils) but lacks the pigment that the binder is meant to hold together. You can find them sold individually or as part of a colored pencil accessory set. Here is what a colorless blender looks like:\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/colorless-blender.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3184\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/colorless-blender.jpg\" alt=\"colorless blender\" width=\"800\" height=\"212\" /></a>\r\n\r\nAs you can see in the example below, the box on the left contains only True Blue and is not burnished. The box on the right contains the True Blue after it has been burnished with the colorless blender. Again, you should use heavy pressure.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-colorless-blender.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3185\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-colorless-blender.jpg\" alt=\"true blue colorless blender\" width=\"468\" height=\"344\" /></a>\r\n<h3>Which Technique Is Best?</h3>\r\nYou might notice that with both techniques, the True Blue experiences a change in value after being burnished.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white-and-colorless-blender.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3186\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/true-blue-white-and-colorless-blender.jpg\" alt=\"true blue white and colorless blender\" width=\"452\" height=\"648\" /></a>\r\n\r\nYou might also notice that the white has a much greater effect on the change in value while the colorless blender\'s effect on value change is not as noticeable. You will have to decide what kind of effect you are going for, and that will help you decide on which technique to use.\r\n<h2>Drawing, Coloring, and Painting</h2>\r\nNot only is burnishing similar to painting, but it is also similar to the blending process of graphite pencils. Just like smoothing and blending out the graphite helps our black and white pencil art look more realistic, the burnishing process smooths and blends out the colors in our colored pencil art.\r\n\r\nNow you can see that with the help of burnishing, art drawn in colored pencils can appear even more like paintings. So the next time you \"draw\" in colored pencil, remember to try out one or both of these burnishing techniques and \"paint\" in colored pencil instead!','How to \"Paint\" with Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3176-revision-v1','','','2016-07-15 12:06:35','2016-07-15 19:06:35','',3176,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3176-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3190,2,'2016-07-16 06:23:21','2016-07-16 13:23:21','VIDEO\r\n\r\npressure plays an important role in how a colored pencil will behave on a surface. therefore it\'s important to consider the amount of pressure you apply when you\'re making marks on a surface. logically, an infinite range can be applied when you are using a colored pencil. but for this video series we\'ll simplify it into three categories: light pressure, medium pressure, and heavy pressure.\r\n\r\n*****\r\n\r\nEBOOK\r\n\r\nThe pressure placed on the pencil will greatly affect the marks that are made and the behavior of the medium on the surface.\r\n\r\nLight Pressure Medium Pressure Heavy Pressure\r\n\r\nVarying the pressure placed on the pencil will affect the value and intensity of the color that is applied. By varying the intensity, the artist has complete control over the marks and the color.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure\r\n\r\n*****\r\n\r\nNOTES\r\n\r\nconsider amount of pressure you apply\r\n\r\nthree categories\r\n\r\nvarying pressure to affect value and intensity with hatching and crosshatching','pressure','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-16 06:23:21','2016-07-16 13:23:21','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3191,2,'2016-07-16 08:10:59','2016-07-16 15:10:59','&nbsp;\r\n\r\nWhen you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\nLight pressure means you are .... - see through\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nMedium pressure - mix together\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nHeavy pressure -mix together, end goal\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nVarying the pressure placed on the pencil will affect the value and intensity of the color that is applied. By varying the intensity, the artist has complete control over the marks and the color.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Closing...</h2>\r\nbegin with light pressure and layer over colors with light pressure, medium, and work you way up to heavy pressure\r\n\r\nRemember from now on to always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using and plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','pressure','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-16 08:10:59','2016-07-16 15:10:59','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3192,2,'2016-07-16 08:11:19','2016-07-16 15:11:19','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\nLight pressure means you are .... - see through\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nMedium pressure - mix together\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nHeavy pressure -mix together, end goal\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nVarying the pressure placed on the pencil will affect the value and intensity of the color that is applied. By varying the intensity, the artist has complete control over the marks and the color.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Closing...</h2>\r\nbegin with light pressure and layer over colors with light pressure, medium, and work you way up to heavy pressure\r\n\r\nRemember from now on to always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using and plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','pressure','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-16 08:11:19','2016-07-16 15:11:19','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3193,2,'2016-07-16 08:11:41','2016-07-16 15:11:41','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\nLight pressure means you are .... - see through\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nMedium pressure - mix together\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nHeavy pressure -mix together, end goal\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\nVarying the pressure placed on the pencil will affect the value and intensity of the color that is applied. By varying the intensity, the artist has complete control over the marks and the color.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Closing...</h2>\r\nbegin with light pressure and layer over colors with light pressure, medium, and work you way up to heavy pressure\r\n\r\nRemember from now on to always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using and plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.','pressure','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-16 08:11:41','2016-07-16 15:11:41','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3195,2,'2016-07-21 22:06:27','2016-07-22 05:06:27','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.*****\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\nLight pressure means you are .... - see through\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nMedium pressure - mix together\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\nHeavy pressure -mix together, end goal\r\n\r\npic - single line, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\nVarying the pressure placed on the pencil will affect the value and intensity of the color that is applied. By varying the intensity, the artist has complete control over the marks and the color.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Closing...</h2>\r\nbegin with light pressure and layer over colors with light pressure, medium, and work you way up to heavy pressure\r\n\r\nRemember from now on to always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using and plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.','pressure','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-21 22:06:27','2016-07-22 05:06:27','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3196,2,'2016-07-22 08:02:50','2016-07-22 15:02:50','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Light pressure</strong></em> means you are lightly and gently touching the paper as you move the pencil across it. It is helpful to use light pressure on the beginning layers of a piece of work. As you layer colors over the light application, this light layer will show through and result in a nice color mix.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Medium pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down on the the paper harder, but not too hard. The color on the paper will have a slightly darker value. As you layer different colors over one another with medium pressure, it will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Heavy pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down very firmly with your pencil. The result on your paper will be a heavier, more intense value of the color. This too will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together even more. You should consider using heavy pressure on the final layers of your drawing.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\nNot only should you use a mix of light, medium, and heavy pressure layers as you are progressing through a drawing, but you can also vary the pressure of the pencil before you lift it from the paper. In the example below, this single pencil stroke begins with heavy pressure and tapers off with light pressure.\r\n\r\n***pic - heavy to light\r\n\r\nBy varying the pressure placed on the pencil, you will get a range of color values and intensity with each stroke.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Closing...</h2>\r\nbegin with light pressure and layer over colors progressively with light pressure, medium, and work you way up to heavy pressure. mixed colors equals more natural looking drawings\r\n\r\nRemember from now on to always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using and plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.','pressure','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-22 08:02:50','2016-07-22 15:02:50','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3213,2,'2016-07-26 06:25:44','2016-07-26 13:25:44','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n***pic red value scale***\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n***pic blue value scale***\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n***pic green value scale***\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n***pic tints and shades***\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\r\n\r\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\r\n\r\n***pic sphere with labels***\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nHighlight - area on an object where light is hitting directly. This area is typically indicated using the lightest values of a color.\r\n\r\nMidtone - area of middle value\r\n\r\nCore Shadow - area of shadow on the object. This area is typically indicated by the shades of the color.\r\n\r\nReflected Highlight - area on the object where light has reflected off of surrounding objects onto the surface.\r\n\r\nCast Shadow - area of shadow cast on surrounding objects.','value','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-26 06:25:44','2016-07-26 13:25:44','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3214,2,'2016-07-26 07:18:48','2016-07-26 14:18:48','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n***pic red value scale***\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n***pic blue value scale***\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n***pic green value scale***\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n***pic tints and shades***\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\r\n\r\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a colored pencil drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\r\n\r\n***pic sphere with labels***\r\n\r\nThe <strong>highlight</strong> on an object is the lightest value of the scale. It is of such a light value that it appears nearly or completely white. This is the spot where direct light is striking the object.\r\n\r\nThe next value on the scale which is slightly darker than the highlight is the <strong>reflected highlight</strong>. This tint consists of light bouncing back from surrounding surfaces. The reflected highlight is usually found along the edge of an object. It gives roundness to an object as it curves back toward darker, more shadowy areas.\r\n\r\nThe <strong>midtone</strong> is the true color of the object. Therefore, it has the middle value within the scale. This area of the object has neither light shining on it nor shadow cast upon it.\r\n\r\nThe first shade on the scale is called a <strong>core shadow</strong>. This simply indicates an area of shadow where the object is receding from the light source.\r\n\r\nThe final value of the scale is the <strong>cast shadow</strong>. This is where you will find the darkest values of the drawing, nearly black, since it represents that shadow that your object is casting onto a surface.\r\n\r\nOne thing you may notice about the object itself: there are no hard edges where one value stops and another value begins. Rather, there is a gradual transition from one value to the next. Remember this important detail when you are applying a value scale to your drawings!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Identify and Apply Values in Your Artwork','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-26 07:18:48','2016-07-26 14:18:48','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3216,2,'2016-07-27 08:16:21','2016-07-27 15:16:21','','blue value scale','','inherit','open','closed','','blue-value-scale','','','2016-07-27 08:16:21','2016-07-27 15:16:21','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3215,2,'2016-07-27 04:46:48','2016-07-27 11:46:48','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n***pic red value scale***\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n***pic blue value scale***\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n***pic green value scale***\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n***pic tints and shades***\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\r\n\r\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a colored pencil drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\r\n\r\n***pic sphere with labels***\r\n\r\nThe <strong>highlight</strong> on an object is the lightest value of the scale. It is of such a light value that it appears nearly or completely white. This is the spot where direct light is striking the object.\r\n\r\nThe next value on the scale which is slightly darker than the highlight is the <strong>reflected highlight</strong>. This tint consists of light bouncing back from surrounding surfaces. The reflected highlight is usually found along the edge of an object. It gives roundness to an object as it curves back toward darker, more shadowy areas.\r\n\r\nThe <strong>midtone</strong> is the true color of the object. Therefore, it has the middle value within the scale. This area of the object has neither light shining on it nor shadow cast upon it.\r\n\r\nThe first shade on the scale is called a <strong>core shadow</strong>. This simply indicates an area of shadow where the object is receding from the light source.\r\n\r\nThe final value of the scale is the <strong>cast shadow</strong>. This is where you will find the darkest values of the drawing, nearly black, since it represents that shadow that your object is casting onto a surface.\r\n\r\nOne thing you may notice about the object itself: there are no hard edges where one value stops and another value begins. Rather, there is a gradual transition from one value to the next. Remember this important detail when you are applying a value scale to your drawings!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Identify and Apply Value in Your Artwork','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-27 04:46:48','2016-07-27 11:46:48','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3198,2,'2016-07-23 05:20:44','2016-07-23 12:20:44','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Light pressure</strong></em> means you are lightly and gently touching the paper as you move the pencil across it. It is helpful to use light pressure on the beginning layers of a piece of work. As you layer colors over the light application, this light layer will show through and result in a nice color mix.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Medium pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down on the the paper harder, but not too hard. The color on the paper will have a slightly darker value. As you layer different colors over one another with medium pressure, it will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Heavy pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down very firmly with your pencil. The result on your paper will be a heavier, more intense value of the color. This too will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together even more. You should consider using heavy pressure on the final layers of your drawing.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\nNot only should you use a mix of light, medium, and heavy pressure layers as you are progressing through a drawing, but you can also vary the pressure of the pencil before you lift it from the paper. In the example below, this single pencil stroke begins with heavy pressure and tapers off with light pressure.\r\n\r\n***pic - heavy to light\r\n\r\nBy varying the pressure placed on the pencil, you will get a range of color values and intensity with each stroke.\r\n\r\nHatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\nCross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Closing...</h2>\r\nbegin with light pressure and layer over colors progressively with light pressure, medium, and work you way up to heavy pressure. mixed colors equals more natural looking drawings\r\n\r\nRemember from now on to always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using and plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.','Put Some Pressure on Your Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-23 05:20:44','2016-07-23 12:20:44','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3200,2,'2016-07-23 07:49:30','2016-07-23 14:49:30','','01 light pressure','','inherit','open','closed','','01-light-pressure','','','2016-07-23 07:49:30','2016-07-23 14:49:30','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-light-pressure.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3199,2,'2016-07-23 05:39:52','2016-07-23 12:39:52','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Light pressure</strong></em> means you are lightly and gently touching the paper as you move the pencil across it. It is helpful to use light pressure on the beginning layers of a piece of work. As you layer colors over the light application, this light layer will show through and result in a nice color mix.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Medium pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down on the the paper harder, but not too hard. The color on the paper will have a slightly darker value. As you layer different colors over one another with medium pressure, it will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Heavy pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down very firmly with your pencil. The result on your paper will be a heavier, more intense value of the color. This too will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together even more. You should consider using heavy pressure on the final layers of your drawing.\r\n\r\n***pic - single lines, hatching, crosshatching with diff colors\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\nNot only should you use a mix of light, medium, and heavy pressure layers as you are progressing through a drawing, but you can also vary the pressure of the pencil before you lift it from the paper. In the example below, this single pencil stroke begins with heavy pressure and tapers off with light pressure.\r\n\r\n***pic - heavy to light\r\n\r\nBy varying the pressure placed on the pencil, you will get a range of color values and intensity with each stroke.\r\n\r\nIn this example, you can see an instance of hatching where the pressure is varied from heavy at the bottom to light at the top...\r\n\r\n***pic - Hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n\r\n...and here, you can see crosshatching where the pressure is again varied from heavy to light with each pencil stroke.\r\n\r\n***pic - Cross hatching with varied pressure - heavy to light\r\n<h2>Pressure Rule of Thumb</h2>\r\nA nice, rich mix of colors will make your drawings appear more natural. In general, remember to begin your initial layers with light pressure. Then layer over colors progressively with medium pressure, and work you way up to heavy pressure. You should have heavy applications of color in the final stages.\r\n\r\nSo from now on, always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using. Plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.','Put Some Pressure on Your Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-23 05:39:52','2016-07-23 12:39:52','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3201,2,'2016-07-23 07:49:32','2016-07-23 14:49:32','','02 medium pressure','','inherit','open','closed','','02-medium-pressure','','','2016-07-23 07:49:32','2016-07-23 14:49:32','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-medium-pressure.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3202,2,'2016-07-23 07:49:34','2016-07-23 14:49:34','','03 heavy pressure','','inherit','open','closed','','03-heavy-pressure','','','2016-07-23 07:49:34','2016-07-23 14:49:34','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-heavy-pressure.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3203,2,'2016-07-23 07:49:35','2016-07-23 14:49:35','','04 light to heavy stroke','','inherit','open','closed','','04-light-to-heavy-stroke','','','2016-07-23 07:49:35','2016-07-23 14:49:35','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-light-to-heavy-stroke.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3204,2,'2016-07-23 07:49:37','2016-07-23 14:49:37','','05 heavy to light hatching','','inherit','open','closed','','05-heavy-to-light-hatching','','','2016-07-23 07:49:37','2016-07-23 14:49:37','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-heavy-to-light-hatching.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3205,2,'2016-07-23 07:49:39','2016-07-23 14:49:39','','06 heavy to light crosshatching','','inherit','open','closed','','06-heavy-to-light-crosshatching','','','2016-07-23 07:49:39','2016-07-23 14:49:39','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-heavy-to-light-crosshatching.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3206,2,'2016-07-23 07:53:33','2016-07-23 14:53:33','When you draw or \"color\" with colored pencils, are you paying attention to how much pressure you put on the pencil?\r\n\r\nIf not, then you should.\r\n\r\nMany people may not think the amount of pressure you place on your colored pencil makes a difference. This certainly did not occur to me before I learned otherwise.\r\n\r\nHowever, the pressure you place on your pencil does have a noticeable effect on the marks made on your paper. Believe it or not, the medium will also \"behave\" a certain way on the surface depending on the pressure you use.\r\n\r\nLet\'s take a closer look at the different types of pressure you should use and when you should use them.\r\n<h2>Pressure Categories for Using Colored Pencils</h2>\r\nOf course if you think about it, the range of pressure you can apply to a colored pencil is endless. You can do anything from barely touch the surface to press so hard that the \"lead\" breaks.\r\n\r\nSince it is unlikely that you will do either of these two extremes purposefully, let\'s make this real simple. Here are the three very broad categories of pressure you should be aware of when using your colored pencils:\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Light pressure</strong></em> means you are lightly and gently touching the paper as you move the pencil across it. It is helpful to use light pressure on the beginning layers of a piece of work. As you layer colors over the light application, this light layer will show through and result in a nice color mix.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-light-pressure.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3200\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/01-light-pressure.jpg\" alt=\"01 light pressure\" width=\"800\" height=\"251\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Medium pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down on the the paper harder, but not too hard. The color on the paper will have a slightly darker value. As you layer different colors over one another with medium pressure, it will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-medium-pressure.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3201\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/02-medium-pressure.jpg\" alt=\"02 medium pressure\" width=\"800\" height=\"251\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<em><strong>Heavy pressure</strong></em> means you are pressing down very firmly with your pencil. The result on your paper will be a heavier, more intense value of the color. This too will cause the pigment from the pencils to mix together even more. You should consider using heavy pressure on the final layers of your drawing.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-heavy-pressure.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3202\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/03-heavy-pressure.jpg\" alt=\"03 heavy pressure\" width=\"800\" height=\"244\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Varying the Pressure</h2>\r\nNot only should you use a mix of light, medium, and heavy pressure layers as you are progressing through a drawing, but you can also vary the pressure of the pencil before you lift it from the paper. In the example below, this single pencil stroke begins with heavy pressure and tapers off with light pressure.\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-light-to-heavy-stroke.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3203\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/04-light-to-heavy-stroke.jpg\" alt=\"04 light to heavy stroke\" width=\"800\" height=\"241\" /></a>\r\n\r\nBy varying the pressure placed on the pencil, you will get a range of color values and intensity with each stroke.\r\n\r\nIn this example, you can see an instance of hatching where the pressure is varied from heavy at the bottom to light at the top...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-heavy-to-light-hatching.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3204\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/05-heavy-to-light-hatching.jpg\" alt=\"05 heavy to light hatching\" width=\"464\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and here, you can see crosshatching where the pressure is again varied from heavy to light with each pencil stroke.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-heavy-to-light-crosshatching.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3205\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/06-heavy-to-light-crosshatching.jpg\" alt=\"06 heavy to light crosshatching\" width=\"471\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n<h2>Pressure Rule of Thumb</h2>\r\nA nice, rich mix of colors will make your drawings appear more natural. In general, remember to begin your initial layers with light pressure. Then layer over colors progressively with medium pressure, and work you way up to heavy pressure. You should have heavy applications of color in the final stages.\r\n\r\nSo from now on, always consciously be aware of the pressure you are using. Plan for the right amount of pressure for the task at hand whenever you make colored pencil marks on your paper.','Put Some Pressure on Your Colored Pencils','','inherit','closed','closed','','3189-revision-v1','','','2016-07-23 07:53:33','2016-07-23 14:53:33','',3189,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3189-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3208,2,'2016-07-27 08:18:14','2016-07-27 15:18:14','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3219\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"red value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3216\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"blue value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3218\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"green value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3220\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\" alt=\"tints and shades\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\r\n\r\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a colored pencil drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3217\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\" alt=\"five value scale color sphere\" width=\"600\" height=\"554\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe <strong>highlight</strong> on an object is the lightest value of the scale. It is of such a light value that it appears nearly or completely white. This is the spot where direct light is striking the object.\r\n\r\nThe next value on the scale which is slightly darker than the highlight is the <strong>reflected highlight</strong>. This tint consists of light bouncing back from surrounding surfaces. The reflected highlight is usually found along the edge of an object. It gives roundness to an object as it curves back toward darker, more shadowy areas.\r\n\r\nThe <strong>midtone</strong> is the true color of the object. Therefore, it has the middle value within the scale. This area of the object has neither light shining on it nor shadow cast upon it.\r\n\r\nThe first shade on the scale is called a <strong>core shadow</strong>. This simply indicates an area of shadow where the object is receding from the light source.\r\n\r\nThe final value of the scale is the <strong>cast shadow</strong>. This is where you will find the darkest values of the drawing, nearly black, since it represents that shadow that your object is casting onto a surface.\r\n\r\nOne thing you may notice about the object itself: there are no hard edges where one value stops and another value begins. Rather, there is a gradual transition from one value to the next. Remember this important detail when you are applying a value scale to your drawings!\r\n\r\nI happen to be an affiliate for a very comprehensive course on colored pencils. It will teach you in greater detail about applying value to your colored pencil drawings, and much more. You can <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/the-colored-pencil-course/\">click here to learn more</a> about it.','How to Identify and Apply Value in Your Artwork','','publish','open','open','','how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork','','','2016-07-30 09:21:05','2016-07-30 16:21:05','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3208',0,'post','',0),(3209,2,'2016-07-23 20:38:47','2016-07-24 03:38:47','we’ll take a look at the importance of value\r\n\r\nWhat is Value?\r\n\r\nValue is one of the seven elements of art. It can be defined as the darkness or lightness of a color. The relationship between darks and lights on and around objects affects how our minds perceive these objects.\r\n\r\nValue can be measured through the use of a value scale. Light values are referred to as “tints”, while dark values are referred to as “shades”.\r\n\r\nHow value manifests in a drawing… The placement of dark values (shades) and light values (tints) creates the illusion of light and form in a drawing. Tints are typically used for highlights and shades are typically used for shadows.\r\n\r\nThe Arrangement of Values\r\n\r\nThe arrangement of values on and around objects is what informs the viewer of the light within the scene and the form of the objects within. These areas can be defined by specific names.\r\n\r\nHighlight - area on an object where light is hitting directly. This area is typically indicated using the lightest values of a color.\r\n\r\nMidtone - area of middle value\r\n\r\nCore Shadow - area of shadow on the object. This area is typically indicated by the shades of the color.\r\n\r\nReflected Highlight - area on the object where light has reflected off of surrounding objects onto the surface.\r\n\r\nCast Shadow - area of shadow cast on surrounding objects.','value','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-23 20:38:47','2016-07-24 03:38:47','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3210,2,'2016-07-23 20:44:22','2016-07-24 03:44:22','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art.\r\n\r\n**********\r\n\r\nwe’ll take a look at the importance of value\r\n\r\nWhat is Value?\r\n\r\nValue is one of the seven elements of art. It can be defined as the darkness or lightness of a color. The relationship between darks and lights on and around objects affects how our minds perceive these objects.\r\n\r\nValue can be measured through the use of a value scale. Light values are referred to as “tints”, while dark values are referred to as “shades”.\r\n\r\nHow value manifests in a drawing… The placement of dark values (shades) and light values (tints) creates the illusion of light and form in a drawing. Tints are typically used for highlights and shades are typically used for shadows.\r\n\r\nThe Arrangement of Values\r\n\r\nThe arrangement of values on and around objects is what informs the viewer of the light within the scene and the form of the objects within. These areas can be defined by specific names.\r\n\r\nHighlight - area on an object where light is hitting directly. This area is typically indicated using the lightest values of a color.\r\n\r\nMidtone - area of middle value\r\n\r\nCore Shadow - area of shadow on the object. This area is typically indicated by the shades of the color.\r\n\r\nReflected Highlight - area on the object where light has reflected off of surrounding objects onto the surface.\r\n\r\nCast Shadow - area of shadow cast on surrounding objects.','value','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-23 20:44:22','2016-07-24 03:44:22','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3211,2,'2016-07-24 06:01:42','2016-07-24 13:01:42','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n***pic red value scale***\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n***pic blue value scale***\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n***pic green value scale***\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n***pic tints and shades***\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\n**********\r\n\r\nHow value manifests in a drawing… The placement of dark values (shades) and light values (tints) creates the illusion of light and form in a drawing. Tints are typically used for highlights and shades are typically used for shadows.\r\n\r\nThe Arrangement of Values\r\n\r\nThe arrangement of values on and around objects is what informs the viewer of the light within the scene and the form of the objects within. These areas can be defined by specific names.\r\n\r\nHighlight - area on an object where light is hitting directly. This area is typically indicated using the lightest values of a color.\r\n\r\nMidtone - area of middle value\r\n\r\nCore Shadow - area of shadow on the object. This area is typically indicated by the shades of the color.\r\n\r\nReflected Highlight - area on the object where light has reflected off of surrounding objects onto the surface.\r\n\r\nCast Shadow - area of shadow cast on surrounding objects.','value','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-24 06:01:42','2016-07-24 13:01:42','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3217,2,'2016-07-27 08:16:23','2016-07-27 15:16:23','','five value scale color sphere','','inherit','open','closed','','five-value-scale-color-sphere','','','2016-07-27 08:16:23','2016-07-27 15:16:23','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3218,2,'2016-07-27 08:16:24','2016-07-27 15:16:24','','green value scale','','inherit','open','closed','','green-value-scale','','','2016-07-27 08:16:24','2016-07-27 15:16:24','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3219,2,'2016-07-27 08:16:26','2016-07-27 15:16:26','','red value scale','','inherit','open','closed','','red-value-scale','','','2016-07-27 08:16:26','2016-07-27 15:16:26','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3220,2,'2016-07-27 08:16:28','2016-07-27 15:16:28','','tints and shades','','inherit','open','closed','','tints-and-shades','','','2016-07-27 08:16:28','2016-07-27 15:16:28','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3221,2,'2016-07-27 08:18:14','2016-07-27 15:18:14','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3219\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"red value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3216\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"blue value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3218\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"green value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3220\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\" alt=\"tints and shades\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\r\n\r\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a colored pencil drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3217\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\" alt=\"five value scale color sphere\" width=\"600\" height=\"554\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe <strong>highlight</strong> on an object is the lightest value of the scale. It is of such a light value that it appears nearly or completely white. This is the spot where direct light is striking the object.\r\n\r\nThe next value on the scale which is slightly darker than the highlight is the <strong>reflected highlight</strong>. This tint consists of light bouncing back from surrounding surfaces. The reflected highlight is usually found along the edge of an object. It gives roundness to an object as it curves back toward darker, more shadowy areas.\r\n\r\nThe <strong>midtone</strong> is the true color of the object. Therefore, it has the middle value within the scale. This area of the object has neither light shining on it nor shadow cast upon it.\r\n\r\nThe first shade on the scale is called a <strong>core shadow</strong>. This simply indicates an area of shadow where the object is receding from the light source.\r\n\r\nThe final value of the scale is the <strong>cast shadow</strong>. This is where you will find the darkest values of the drawing, nearly black, since it represents that shadow that your object is casting onto a surface.\r\n\r\nOne thing you may notice about the object itself: there are no hard edges where one value stops and another value begins. Rather, there is a gradual transition from one value to the next. Remember this important detail when you are applying a value scale to your drawings!\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Identify and Apply Value in Your Artwork','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-27 08:18:14','2016-07-27 15:18:14','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3222,2,'2016-07-27 10:44:30','2016-07-27 17:44:30','','DSC01428','\"Stephen Tyler\" by Shaz','inherit','open','closed','','dsc01428','','','2016-07-28 10:35:23','2016-07-28 17:35:23','',659,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2013/07/DSC01428.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3223,2,'2016-07-27 10:44:53','2016-07-27 17:44:53','Use these drawings of celebrities and prominent people as examples of how to capture the likenesses of well-known people. Remember that when you are trying to draw people well enough and detailed enough for them to be recognizable as the intended person, it is often helpful to practice by drawing famous faces. I mean, what better test of your drawing skills than to show your work to people who immediately know who you were trying to draw, right?\r\n\r\nYou will see familiar drawings of different skill levels and different levels of detail in this gallery. Some drawings you may recognize, while others you may not. No matter how much or how little a drawing here captures a resemblance, take the opportunity to learn something from each piece. Some questions you may ask yourself as you view this gallery are:\r\n<ul>\r\n 	<li>Which obvious features did the artist include to help make the famous face easily recognizable?</li>\r\n 	<li>Which details or subtle facial characteristics did the artist include to obtain such an accurate likeness of the subject?</li>\r\n 	<li> What could the artist have done differently to make a better representation of the celebrity?</li>\r\n</ul>\r\nThank you in advance to all artists who contribute their drawings of well-known faces to this gallery! Remember, too, that it\'s okay if your drawing doesn\'t come out perfectly or to your satisfaction. I am still hard on myself with some of my work, and I always see something I could have done differently for better results (even with my own drawings in this gallery!). The important thing to remember is, you should always feel good about sharing your artwork, celebrate your strengths, and learn from your mistakes.\r\n\r\nIf you have <strong>your own</strong> celebrity portrait drawing that you want others to view in this gallery, <a title=\"Share Your Work in a Portrait Gallery!\" href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/share-your-work/\">see how to share it with us</a>.\r\n\r\n[gallery link=\"file\" ids=\"759,753,734,799,798,797,796,790,791,792,793,794,789,788,787,786,785,784,783,795,1171,1633,1721,2483,2489,2569,2642,3222\" orderby=\"rand\"]','Drawings of Well-Known Faces','','inherit','closed','closed','','659-revision-v1','','','2016-07-27 10:44:53','2016-07-27 17:44:53','',659,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/659-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3224,2,'2016-08-06 16:31:29','2016-08-06 23:31:29','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\nAs you will see, we are going to take this tutorial down a path that slightly differs from some of my previous ones. After the initial guidelines are established, the drawing will be completed in stages. Additionally, we are going beyond the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/are-you-a-lazy-artist-if-you-just-make-line-drawing-portraits/\" target=\"_blank\">line drawing</a> stages with this one by shading our subjects. Therefore, make sure you have a tortillion to blend tones and a kneaded eraser to lift out highlights.\r\n\r\nWith that said, here is the reference photograph. Take a look and let\'s get started!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3252\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"550\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3252 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/tmcphotos_info\">Tmcphotos</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\" target=\"_blank\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photo</a> to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\" target=\"_blank\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\" target=\"_blank\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nTake a final look at your drawing. Look for any tweaks you want to make: darker shadows, picking out lighter areas, better defining areas for contrast, etc.\r\n\r\nThat essentially completes this tutorial! When I originally set out to do this, I planned on adding only a little shading to change things up a bit. As I got going, I decided to add more. However, the level of detail you desire is up to you. If you wish, don\'t stop where I did. You can continue to layer in more tones as often as you want. The more you do, the more realistic your drawing can become!','How to Draw Women Stretching','','publish','open','open','','how-to-draw-women-stretching','','','2016-08-06 16:48:52','2016-08-06 23:48:52','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/?p=3224',0,'post','',0),(3225,2,'2016-07-28 22:18:54','2016-07-29 05:18:54','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching.','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-07-28 22:18:54','2016-07-29 05:18:54','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3227,2,'2016-07-30 09:21:05','2016-07-30 16:21:05','No doubt you have heard the word \"value\" thrown around among artists regarding artwork. However, do you know exactly what the word \"value\" means?\r\n\r\nValue is a very important element of art. Value is simply a word used to describe how light or how dark a color is. Our eyes and our minds perceive the world around us based on lights and darks and how they relate to one another.\r\n<h2>How to Measure Value</h2>\r\nOne way to measure value is by using a value scale. A value scale is usually a display of boxes with one color in the middle and variations of that color on either side. Progressively lighter versions of the color are on one side, and progressively darker versions of the color are on the other side. Below is a value scale for the color red...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3219\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/red-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"red value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and here is a value scale for blue...\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3216\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/blue-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"blue value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\n...and another value scale for green.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3218\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/green-value-scale.jpg\" alt=\"green value scale\" width=\"600\" height=\"100\" /></a>\r\n\r\nWe call the lighter values <strong>tints</strong> and the darker values <strong>shades</strong>.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3220\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/tints-and-shades.jpg\" alt=\"tints and shades\" width=\"600\" height=\"400\" /></a>\r\n<h2>How a Value Scale Applies to a Drawing</h2>\r\nSince drawing takes place on a two-dimensional surface of neutral color, it\'s up to the artist to create an illusion of three dimensions. That means the viewer of the artwork needs to perceive form and depth. Knowledge of the value scale and careful placement of tints and shades helps the artist to achieve this.\r\n\r\nIn general, you should use tints for highlights and shades for shadows.\r\n\r\nOne way  to simplify the vast array of values that could be present in a drawing is to use a five-value scale. The five values on this scale are used for specific areas of an object to help develop that three-dimensional form for the object.\r\n\r\nFor simplicity\'s sake, let\'s look at a colored pencil drawing of a sphere to see how a five-value scale applies to it.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3217\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/five-value-scale-color-sphere.jpg\" alt=\"five value scale color sphere\" width=\"600\" height=\"554\" /></a>\r\n\r\nThe <strong>highlight</strong> on an object is the lightest value of the scale. It is of such a light value that it appears nearly or completely white. This is the spot where direct light is striking the object.\r\n\r\nThe next value on the scale which is slightly darker than the highlight is the <strong>reflected highlight</strong>. This tint consists of light bouncing back from surrounding surfaces. The reflected highlight is usually found along the edge of an object. It gives roundness to an object as it curves back toward darker, more shadowy areas.\r\n\r\nThe <strong>midtone</strong> is the true color of the object. Therefore, it has the middle value within the scale. This area of the object has neither light shining on it nor shadow cast upon it.\r\n\r\nThe first shade on the scale is called a <strong>core shadow</strong>. This simply indicates an area of shadow where the object is receding from the light source.\r\n\r\nThe final value of the scale is the <strong>cast shadow</strong>. This is where you will find the darkest values of the drawing, nearly black, since it represents that shadow that your object is casting onto a surface.\r\n\r\nOne thing you may notice about the object itself: there are no hard edges where one value stops and another value begins. Rather, there is a gradual transition from one value to the next. Remember this important detail when you are applying a value scale to your drawings!\r\n\r\nI happen to be an affiliate for a very comprehensive course on colored pencils. It will teach you in greater detail about applying value to your colored pencil drawings, and much more. You can <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/more/the-colored-pencil-course/\">click here to learn more</a> about it.','How to Identify and Apply Value in Your Artwork','','inherit','closed','closed','','3208-revision-v1','','','2016-07-30 09:21:05','2016-07-30 16:21:05','',3208,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3208-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3229,2,'2016-07-31 18:24:02','2016-08-01 01:24:02','','drawing made easy','','inherit','open','closed','','drawing-made-easy','','','2016-07-31 18:24:02','2016-08-01 01:24:02','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/drawing-made-easy.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3230,2,'2016-07-31 18:24:04','2016-08-01 01:24:04','','fun with caricatures','','inherit','open','closed','','fun-with-caricatures','','','2016-07-31 18:24:04','2016-08-01 01:24:04','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/fun-with-caricatures.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3231,2,'2016-07-31 18:24:06','2016-08-01 01:24:06','','how to sketch ebook','','inherit','open','closed','','how-to-sketch-ebook','','','2016-07-31 18:24:06','2016-08-01 01:24:06','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/how-to-sketch-ebook.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3232,2,'2016-07-31 18:24:07','2016-08-01 01:24:07','','the colored pencil course','','inherit','open','closed','','the-colored-pencil-course','','','2016-07-31 18:24:07','2016-08-01 01:24:07','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/the-colored-pencil-course.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3233,2,'2016-07-31 18:24:09','2016-08-01 01:24:09','','the secrets to drawing','','inherit','open','closed','','the-secrets-to-drawing','','','2016-07-31 18:24:09','2016-08-01 01:24:09','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/the-secrets-to-drawing.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3234,2,'2016-07-31 18:24:11','2016-08-01 01:24:11','','turn your hobby into a business','','inherit','open','closed','','turn-your-hobby-into-a-business','','','2016-07-31 18:24:11','2016-08-01 01:24:11','',0,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/07/turn-your-hobby-into-a-business.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3236,2,'2016-08-05 07:22:43','2016-08-05 14:22:43','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching.\r\n\r\n***graphics on pics???***\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-05 07:22:43','2016-08-05 14:22:43','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3237,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:36','2016-08-06 12:55:36','','01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines','','inherit','open','closed','','01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines','','','2016-08-06 05:55:36','2016-08-06 12:55:36','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3238,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:38','2016-08-06 12:55:38','','02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines','','inherit','open','closed','','02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines','','','2016-08-06 05:55:38','2016-08-06 12:55:38','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3239,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:40','2016-08-06 12:55:40','','03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines','','inherit','open','closed','','03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines','','','2016-08-06 05:55:40','2016-08-06 12:55:40','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3240,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:42','2016-08-06 12:55:42','','04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines','','inherit','open','closed','','04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines','','','2016-08-06 05:55:42','2016-08-06 12:55:42','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3241,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:43','2016-08-06 12:55:43','','05 how to draw women stretching facial features','','inherit','open','closed','','05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features','','','2016-08-06 05:55:43','2016-08-06 12:55:43','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3242,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:45','2016-08-06 12:55:45','','06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones','','inherit','open','closed','','06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones','','','2016-08-06 05:55:45','2016-08-06 12:55:45','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3243,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:46','2016-08-06 12:55:46','','07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend','','inherit','open','closed','','07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend','','','2016-08-06 05:55:46','2016-08-06 12:55:46','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3244,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:48','2016-08-06 12:55:48','','08 how to draw women stretching hair tones','','inherit','open','closed','','08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones','','','2016-08-06 05:55:48','2016-08-06 12:55:48','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3245,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:49','2016-08-06 12:55:49','','09 how to draw women stretching hair blend','','inherit','open','closed','','09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend','','','2016-08-06 05:55:49','2016-08-06 12:55:49','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3246,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:51','2016-08-06 12:55:51','','10 how to draw women stretching body details','','inherit','open','closed','','10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details','','','2016-08-06 05:55:51','2016-08-06 12:55:51','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3247,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:54','2016-08-06 12:55:54','','11 how to draw women stretching body details tones','','inherit','open','closed','','11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones','','','2016-08-06 05:55:54','2016-08-06 12:55:54','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3248,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:56','2016-08-06 12:55:56','','12 how to draw women stretching body details blend','','inherit','open','closed','','12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend','','','2016-08-06 05:55:56','2016-08-06 12:55:56','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3249,2,'2016-08-06 05:55:58','2016-08-06 12:55:58','','13 how to draw women stretching arms details','','inherit','open','closed','','13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details','','','2016-08-06 05:55:58','2016-08-06 12:55:58','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3250,2,'2016-08-06 05:56:00','2016-08-06 12:56:00','','14 how to draw women stretching arms tones','','inherit','open','closed','','14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones','','','2016-08-06 05:56:00','2016-08-06 12:56:00','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3251,2,'2016-08-06 05:56:02','2016-08-06 12:56:02','','15 how to draw women stretching arms blend','','inherit','open','closed','','15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend','','','2016-08-06 05:56:02','2016-08-06 12:56:02','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3252,2,'2016-08-06 05:56:04','2016-08-06 12:56:04','','how to draw women stretching ref','','inherit','open','closed','','how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref','','','2016-08-06 05:56:04','2016-08-06 12:56:04','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg',0,'attachment','image/jpeg',0),(3253,2,'2016-08-06 06:02:40','2016-08-06 13:02:40','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3252\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 06:02:40','2016-08-06 13:02:40','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3254,2,'2016-08-06 07:52:15','2016-08-06 14:52:15','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. TYPE INTRO LAST What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\ngoing to do this tutorial a little different than past ones. after initial guidelines, complete in stages. also apply shading by blending tones with a tortillion and kneaded eraser\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3252\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the reference photograph to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The reference photograph shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the reference photo to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nttt\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a> <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Final Thoughts</h2>\r\nrecap steps and important points. how to make more detailed\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 07:52:15','2016-08-06 14:52:15','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3255,2,'2016-08-06 16:00:27','2016-08-06 23:00:27','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. TYPE INTRO LAST What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\ngoing to do this tutorial a little different than past ones. after initial guidelines, complete in stages. also apply shading by blending tones with a tortillion and kneaded eraser\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3252\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the reference photograph to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The reference photograph shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the reference photo to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the reference photograph to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nfinishing touches. recap steps and important points. how to make more detailed\r\n\r\n&nbsp;','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 16:00:27','2016-08-06 23:00:27','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3256,2,'2016-08-06 16:30:34','2016-08-06 23:30:34','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\nAs you will see, we are going to take this tutorial down a path that slightly differs from some of my previous ones. After the initial guidelines are established, the drawing will be completed in stages. Additionally, we are going beyond the line drawing stages with this one by shading our subjects. Therefore, make sure you have a tortillion to blend tones and a kneaded eraser to lift out highlights.\r\n\r\nWith that said, here is the reference photograph. Take a look and let\'s get started!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3252\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"550\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3252 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/tmcphotos_info\">Tmcphotos</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the reference photograph to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The reference photograph shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the reference photo to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the reference photograph to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nTake a final look at your drawing. Look for any tweaks you want to make: darker shadows, picking out lighter areas, better defining areas for contrast, etc.\r\n\r\nThat essentially completes this tutorial! When I originally set out to do this, I planned on adding only a little shading to change things up a bit. As I got going, I decided to add more. However, the level of detail you desire is up to you. If you wish, don\'t stop where I did. You can continue to layer in more tones as often as you want. The more you do, the more realistic your drawing can become!','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 16:30:34','2016-08-06 23:30:34','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3257,2,'2016-08-06 16:38:20','2016-08-06 23:38:20','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\nAs you will see, we are going to take this tutorial down a path that slightly differs from some of my previous ones. After the initial guidelines are established, the drawing will be completed in stages. Additionally, we are going beyond the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/are-you-a-lazy-artist-if-you-just-make-line-drawing-portraits/\">line drawing</a> stages with this one by shading our subjects. Therefore, make sure you have a tortillion to blend tones and a kneaded eraser to lift out highlights.\r\n\r\nWith that said, here is the reference photograph. Take a look and let\'s get started!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3252\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"550\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3252 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/tmcphotos_info\">Tmcphotos</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the reference photograph to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The reference photograph shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the reference photo to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the reference photograph to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nTake a final look at your drawing. Look for any tweaks you want to make: darker shadows, picking out lighter areas, better defining areas for contrast, etc.\r\n\r\nThat essentially completes this tutorial! When I originally set out to do this, I planned on adding only a little shading to change things up a bit. As I got going, I decided to add more. However, the level of detail you desire is up to you. If you wish, don\'t stop where I did. You can continue to layer in more tones as often as you want. The more you do, the more realistic your drawing can become!','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 16:38:20','2016-08-06 23:38:20','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3258,2,'2016-08-11 10:32:16','2016-08-11 17:32:16','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\nAs you will see, we are going to take this tutorial down a path that slightly differs from some of my previous ones. After the initial guidelines are established, the drawing will be completed in stages. Additionally, we are going beyond the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/are-you-a-lazy-artist-if-you-just-make-line-drawing-portraits/\" target=\"_blank\">line drawing</a> stages with this one by shading our subjects. Therefore, make sure you have a tortillion to blend tones and a kneaded eraser to lift out highlights.\r\n\r\nWith that said, here is the reference photograph. Take a look and let\'s get started!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3252\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"550\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3252 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/tmcphotos_info\">Tmcphotos</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\" target=\"_blank\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter wp-image-3245 size-full\" title=\"Copyright © 2016 Let\'s Draw People\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photo</a> to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\" target=\"_blank\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\" target=\"_blank\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nTake a final look at your drawing. Look for any tweaks you want to make: darker shadows, picking out lighter areas, better defining areas for contrast, etc.\r\n\r\nThat essentially completes this tutorial! When I originally set out to do this, I planned on adding only a little shading to change things up a bit. As I got going, I decided to add more. However, the level of detail you desire is up to you. If you wish, don\'t stop where I did. You can continue to layer in more tones as often as you want. The more you do, the more realistic your drawing can become!','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-autosave-v1','','','2016-08-11 10:32:16','2016-08-11 17:32:16','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-autosave-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3259,2,'2016-08-06 16:44:49','2016-08-06 23:44:49','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\nAs you will see, we are going to take this tutorial down a path that slightly differs from some of my previous ones. After the initial guidelines are established, the drawing will be completed in stages. Additionally, we are going beyond the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/are-you-a-lazy-artist-if-you-just-make-line-drawing-portraits/\">line drawing</a> stages with this one by shading our subjects. Therefore, make sure you have a tortillion to blend tones and a kneaded eraser to lift out highlights.\r\n\r\nWith that said, here is the reference photograph. Take a look and let\'s get started!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3252\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"550\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3252 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/tmcphotos_info\">Tmcphotos</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photo</a> to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nTake a final look at your drawing. Look for any tweaks you want to make: darker shadows, picking out lighter areas, better defining areas for contrast, etc.\r\n\r\nThat essentially completes this tutorial! When I originally set out to do this, I planned on adding only a little shading to change things up a bit. As I got going, I decided to add more. However, the level of detail you desire is up to you. If you wish, don\'t stop where I did. You can continue to layer in more tones as often as you want. The more you do, the more realistic your drawing can become!','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 16:44:49','2016-08-06 23:44:49','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),(3260,2,'2016-08-06 16:48:52','2016-08-06 23:48:52','In this tutorial, we will draw two women stretching. What will make this drawing a little easier for us is the fact that almost all the angles of the features of the two young women are parallel to each other.\r\n\r\nAs you will see, we are going to take this tutorial down a path that slightly differs from some of my previous ones. After the initial guidelines are established, the drawing will be completed in stages. Additionally, we are going beyond the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/are-you-a-lazy-artist-if-you-just-make-line-drawing-portraits/\" target=\"_blank\">line drawing</a> stages with this one by shading our subjects. Therefore, make sure you have a tortillion to blend tones and a kneaded eraser to lift out highlights.\r\n\r\nWith that said, here is the reference photograph. Take a look and let\'s get started!\r\n\r\n[caption id=\"attachment_3252\" align=\"aligncenter\" width=\"550\"]<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\"><img class=\"wp-image-3252 size-full\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\" alt=\"how to draw women stretching ref\" width=\"550\" height=\"713\" /></a> <center><b> © <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/tmcphotos_info\">Tmcphotos</a> | <a href=\"https://www.dreamstime.com/\">Dreamstime.com</a></b></center>[/caption]\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Draw the Figure Outlines</h2>\r\nBegin by drawing two tilted ovals for the heads. Make sure the angles of the ovals are roughly parallel to one another. Use the reference photograph to account for how much space you should put between the ovals. Also, make the oval on your right ever so slightly smaller than the first one, since this woman is standing slightly farther back.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3237\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/01-how-to-draw-women-stretching-head-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"01 how to draw women stretching head guidelines\" width=\"428\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nContinue to sketch the outline of each figure. To maintain a consistent curvature of the two figures, it\'s helpful to first draw a few extra guidelines. Draw a line from each head that will run the length of each torso, as indicated by the blue arrows. To get the tilt of the shoulders parallel, draw the guidelines perpendicular to the heads, as indicated by the green arrows. Finish up by sketching the outlines for the torso and legs.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3238\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/02-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"02 how to draw women stretching body guidelines\" width=\"432\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nComplete the foundation of each figure by sketching the outline for the arms. Once again, try to keep the angles of each arm mostly consistent between the two women. Before moving on, make sure you remembered to keep the features for the woman on your right slightly smaller.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3239\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/03-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"03 how to draw women stretching arms guidelines\" width=\"427\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Work on the Faces</h2>\r\nDraw the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-draw-faces-tips-techniques-and-short-tutorials/\" target=\"_blank\">basic facial guidelines</a> for each face. Begin with a vertical axis for each head. Check to see that these lines are parallel before doing the others. There is a slight curvature of the vertical axis of the woman on your left since her head is slightly tilted.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3240\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/04-how-to-draw-women-stretching-face-guidelines.jpg\" alt=\"04 how to draw women stretching face guidelines\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the guidelines to sketch the facial features of each woman. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to try to match the unique characteristics of each feature. Carefully look at the hair of each woman and try to capture the directional flow and length.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3241\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/05-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features.jpg\" alt=\"05 how to draw women stretching facial features\" width=\"600\" height=\"499\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAt this point, you can use a kneaded eraser to remove the facial guidelines. Use your pencil to establish a few basic tones in the shaded areas. The <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> shows the light coming from our right, so the darker shaded areas will mostly be on the right side of the women (our left). Leave brighter areas white (like the blue arrow). Also take care to leave areas of reflected light (green arrow) along the border of selected shaded areas.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3242\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/06-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-tones.jpg\" alt=\"06 how to draw women stretching facial features tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse a tortillion to carefully blend the shaded areas. Start with dark and work to light. Pay attention to the photograph to see which light areas need a little tone. Blend smooth transitions between dark and light.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3243\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/07-how-to-draw-women-stretching-facial-features-blend.jpg\" alt=\"07 how to draw women stretching facial features blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"200\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd additional tones to the hair. Since the woman on your left has darker hair, be much more generous when applying graphite. Try to follow the directional flow of sections of hair when applying tones. Leave some areas lighter for highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3244\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/08-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-tones.jpg\" alt=\"08 how to draw women stretching hair tones\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nBlend the hair with your tortillion. Once again, keep consistent with the flow of the hair as your move the tortillion to blend areas. Pick out highlights of sections of hair when needed, and apply pencil strokes from dark areas into the highlights to represent visible strands of hair.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3245\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/09-how-to-draw-women-stretching-hair-blend.jpg\" alt=\"09 how to draw women stretching hair blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"500\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Complete the Torso and Legs</h2>\r\nNow it\'s time to move on to the body. Use the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photo</a> to <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/picture-perfect-clothing-a-beginners-guide-to-sketching-clothes/\" target=\"_blank\">replicate the clothing</a> of each woman. Replicate characteristics such as the hems, seams, and folds.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3246\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/10-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details.jpg\" alt=\"10 how to draw women stretching body details\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nAdd tones to the body of each woman. Use a <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/how-to-identify-and-apply-value-in-your-artwork/\" target=\"_blank\">range of values from dark to light</a>, remembering the light source and where the shades need to be. Don\'t forget the reflected light along the shaded sides.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3247\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/11-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-tones.jpg\" alt=\"11 how to draw women stretching body details tones\" width=\"598\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nIn the same manner that you blended the facial tones with a tortillion, repeat by blending the tones of the body. Smooth out the tones for gradual transitions from dark to light. Be careful not to rub too much graphite in the areas that are supposed to stay lighter. Use the kneaded eraser to pick out highlights.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3248\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/12-how-to-draw-women-stretching-body-details-blend.jpg\" alt=\"12 how to draw women stretching body details blend\" width=\"600\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finish the Arms</h2>\r\nDraw in details for the arms and hands. Include subtle lines to indicate armpits, elbows, and fingers. Draw light lines along the biceps and forearms that will aid in the placement of shading.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3249\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/13-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-details.jpg\" alt=\"13 how to draw women stretching arms details\" width=\"470\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nUse the lines from the last step and the <a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/how-to-draw-women-stretching-ref.jpg\">reference photograph</a> to help you place tones along the right side of each arm (their right). Notice that even though these tones are to represent shading, they shouldn\'t be too dark. Reserve the darkest shading for under the left armpit of each woman.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3250\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/14-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-tones.jpg\" alt=\"14 how to draw women stretching arms tones\" width=\"469\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n\r\nSmooth out tones one last time with a tortillion. Soften the edges if they seem too harsh. Maintain a light area along the middle of each arm and a reflected light along the edges so that the arms keep a cylindrical appearance.\r\n\r\n<a href=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\"><img class=\"aligncenter size-full wp-image-3251\" src=\"http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/wp-content/uploads/2016/08/15-how-to-draw-women-stretching-arms-blend.jpg\" alt=\"15 how to draw women stretching arms blend\" width=\"472\" height=\"600\" /></a>\r\n\r\n&nbsp;\r\n<h2>Finishing Touches</h2>\r\nTake a final look at your drawing. Look for any tweaks you want to make: darker shadows, picking out lighter areas, better defining areas for contrast, etc.\r\n\r\nThat essentially completes this tutorial! When I originally set out to do this, I planned on adding only a little shading to change things up a bit. As I got going, I decided to add more. However, the level of detail you desire is up to you. If you wish, don\'t stop where I did. You can continue to layer in more tones as often as you want. The more you do, the more realistic your drawing can become!','How to Draw Women Stretching','','inherit','closed','closed','','3224-revision-v1','','','2016-08-06 16:48:52','2016-08-06 23:48:52','',3224,'http://www.letsdrawpeople.com/3224-revision-v1/',0,'revision','',0),